[go: up one dir, main page]

CN107003404A - The method and ultrasonic equipment of information are provided using multiple displays - Google Patents

The method and ultrasonic equipment of information are provided using multiple displays Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN107003404A
CN107003404A CN201580066390.5A CN201580066390A CN107003404A CN 107003404 A CN107003404 A CN 107003404A CN 201580066390 A CN201580066390 A CN 201580066390A CN 107003404 A CN107003404 A CN 107003404A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
display
display unit
item
gain
ultrasonic device
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
CN201580066390.5A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN107003404B (en
Inventor
姜皓琼
任震宇
孙基源
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Samsung Electronics Co Ltd filed Critical Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
Priority claimed from PCT/KR2015/010849 external-priority patent/WO2016060475A1/en
Publication of CN107003404A publication Critical patent/CN107003404A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN107003404B publication Critical patent/CN107003404B/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S15/00Systems using the reflection or reradiation of acoustic waves, e.g. sonar systems
    • G01S15/88Sonar systems specially adapted for specific applications
    • G01S15/89Sonar systems specially adapted for specific applications for mapping or imaging
    • G01S15/8906Short-range imaging systems; Acoustic microscope systems using pulse-echo techniques
    • G01S15/899Combination of imaging systems with ancillary equipment
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B8/00Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
    • A61B8/46Ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic devices with special arrangements for interfacing with the operator or the patient
    • A61B8/461Displaying means of special interest
    • A61B8/464Displaying means of special interest involving a plurality of displays
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B8/00Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
    • A61B8/46Ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic devices with special arrangements for interfacing with the operator or the patient
    • A61B8/461Displaying means of special interest
    • A61B8/465Displaying means of special interest adapted to display user selection data, e.g. icons or menus
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B8/00Diagnosis using ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic waves
    • A61B8/46Ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic devices with special arrangements for interfacing with the operator or the patient
    • A61B8/467Ultrasonic, sonic or infrasonic diagnostic devices with special arrangements for interfacing with the operator or the patient characterised by special input means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S7/00Details of systems according to groups G01S13/00, G01S15/00, G01S17/00
    • G01S7/52Details of systems according to groups G01S13/00, G01S15/00, G01S17/00 of systems according to group G01S15/00
    • G01S7/52017Details of systems according to groups G01S13/00, G01S15/00, G01S17/00 of systems according to group G01S15/00 particularly adapted to short-range imaging
    • G01S7/52079Constructional features
    • G01S7/52084Constructional features related to particular user interfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/0482Interaction with lists of selectable items, e.g. menus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04842Selection of displayed objects or displayed text elements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/04847Interaction techniques to control parameter settings, e.g. interaction with sliders or dials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0484Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] for the control of specific functions or operations, e.g. selecting or manipulating an object, an image or a displayed text element, setting a parameter value or selecting a range
    • G06F3/0486Drag-and-drop
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04883Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures for inputting data by handwriting, e.g. gesture or text
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01SRADIO DIRECTION-FINDING; RADIO NAVIGATION; DETERMINING DISTANCE OR VELOCITY BY USE OF RADIO WAVES; LOCATING OR PRESENCE-DETECTING BY USE OF THE REFLECTION OR RERADIATION OF RADIO WAVES; ANALOGOUS ARRANGEMENTS USING OTHER WAVES
    • G01S7/00Details of systems according to groups G01S13/00, G01S15/00, G01S17/00
    • G01S7/52Details of systems according to groups G01S13/00, G01S15/00, G01S17/00 of systems according to group G01S15/00
    • G01S7/52017Details of systems according to groups G01S13/00, G01S15/00, G01S17/00 of systems according to group G01S15/00 particularly adapted to short-range imaging
    • G01S7/52053Display arrangements
    • G01S7/52057Cathode ray tube displays
    • G01S7/52073Production of cursor lines, markers or indicia by electronic means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/041Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
    • G06F2203/041012.5D-digitiser, i.e. digitiser detecting the X/Y position of the input means, finger or stylus, also when it does not touch, but is proximate to the digitiser's interaction surface and also measures the distance of the input means within a short range in the Z direction, possibly with a separate measurement setup
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/048Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/04803Split screen, i.e. subdividing the display area or the window area into separate subareas
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/048Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/04804Transparency, e.g. transparent or translucent windows
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/02Improving the quality of display appearance
    • G09G2320/0271Adjustment of the gradation levels within the range of the gradation scale, e.g. by redistribution or clipping
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2320/00Control of display operating conditions
    • G09G2320/06Adjustment of display parameters
    • G09G2320/0606Manual adjustment

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Radar, Positioning & Navigation (AREA)
  • Remote Sensing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Ultra Sonic Daignosis Equipment (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

本发明提供了超声波设备,包括:第一显示器,配置为显示超声波图像;控制面板,包括与第一显示器不同的并且配置为显示与超声波图像相关的多个控制项目的第二显示器;以及控制器,配置为基于位于第二显示器上的输入工具的位置从多个控制项目中选择至少一个控制项目,并且控制第一显示器与超声波图像一起显示所选择的至少一个控制项目和表示输入工具的位置的指示符。

The present invention provides an ultrasonic device, comprising: a first display configured to display an ultrasonic image; a control panel including a second display different from the first display and configured to display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasonic image; and a controller configured to select at least one control item from the plurality of control items based on the position of an input tool located on the second display, and to control the first display to display the selected at least one control item and an indicator indicating the position of the input tool together with the ultrasonic image.

Description

使用多个显示器提供信息的方法和超声波设备Method and ultrasonic device for providing information using multiple displays

技术领域technical field

与示例性实施例一致的设备和方法包括:包括多个显示单元的超声波设备和通过使用超声波设备中的多个显示单元来提供信息的方法。Devices and methods consistent with exemplary embodiments include an ultrasonic device including a plurality of display units and a method of providing information by using the plurality of display units in the ultrasonic device.

背景技术Background technique

超声波诊断设备从人体表面向人体内的目标对象照射超声波信号,并且接收从目标对象反射的超声波信号,从而基于反射的超声波信号的信息获得关于软组织或血流的断层摄影的图像。The ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus irradiates ultrasonic signals from the surface of the human body to a target object inside the human body, and receives reflected ultrasonic signals from the target object, thereby obtaining tomographic images about soft tissues or blood flow based on information of the reflected ultrasonic signals.

这样的超声波诊断设备可以实时显示信息,并且可以具有小尺寸和较低的操作成本。超声波诊断设备不像X射线那样引起辐射暴露,因此更安全。因此,超声波诊断设备与其他类型的成像诊断装置一起广泛使用,包括X射线诊断装置,计算机断层摄影(CT)扫描仪,磁共振图像(MRI)装置,核医学诊断装置等。Such ultrasonic diagnostic equipment can display information in real time, and can have a small size and low operating cost. Ultrasound diagnostic equipment does not cause radiation exposure like X-rays and is therefore safer. Therefore, ultrasonic diagnostic equipment is widely used together with other types of imaging diagnostic equipment, including X-ray diagnostic equipment, computed tomography (CT) scanners, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) equipment, nuclear medicine diagnostic equipment, and the like.

发明内容Contents of the invention

技术方案Technical solutions

根据一个或多个示例性实施例,提供了一种提供信息的方法,使得在包括多个显示单元的超声波设备中,在扫描超声波图像的同时,用户的视线不指向主屏幕之外。According to one or more exemplary embodiments, there is provided a method of providing information such that a user's line of sight is not directed out of a home screen while scanning an ultrasound image in an ultrasound apparatus including a plurality of display units.

有利效果beneficial effect

根据一个或多个示例性实施例,超声波设备可以提供信息,以便在扫描超声波图像期间不分散用户的眼睛(例如,超声检查者的眼睛)。According to one or more exemplary embodiments, an ultrasound device may provide information so as not to distract a user's eye (eg, a sonographer's eye) during scanning of an ultrasound image.

附图说明Description of drawings

结合附图,从示例性实施例的以下描述,这些和/或其他方面将变得显而易见并且更容易理解,在附图中:These and/or other aspects will become apparent and more readily understood from the following description of exemplary embodiments when taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which:

图1是根据示例性实施例的包括多个显示单元的超声波设备的图;FIG. 1 is a diagram of an ultrasonic device including a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment;

图2A是根据示例性实施例的包括完全由触摸屏形成的控制面板的超声波设备的图;2A is a diagram of an ultrasound device including a control panel formed entirely of a touch screen, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图2B是根据示例性实施例的包括可拆下的显示单元的超声波设备的图;2B is a diagram of an ultrasound device including a detachable display unit according to an exemplary embodiment;

图3是示出根据实施例的便携式超声波设备的图;FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a portable ultrasonic device according to an embodiment;

图4是示出根据示例性实施例的提供超声波设备的信息的方法的流程图;4 is a flowchart illustrating a method of providing information of an ultrasonic device according to an exemplary embodiment;

图5是示出根据示例性实施例的在发生相对于触摸屏的触摸事件的情况下超声波设备的用于指示主屏幕上的至少一个控制项目和指示符的操作的图;5 is a diagram illustrating an operation of an ultrasonic device for indicating at least one control item and an indicator on a home screen in case a touch event occurs with respect to a touch screen, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图6是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备的用于根据预定义手势显示主屏幕上的至少一个控制项目和指示符的操作的图;6 is a diagram illustrating an operation of an ultrasonic device for displaying at least one control item and an indicator on a home screen according to a predefined gesture according to an exemplary embodiment;

图7是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备的用于通过使用压力传感器感测触摸触摸屏的压力的操作的图;7 is a diagram illustrating an operation of an ultrasonic device for sensing a pressure touching a touch screen by using a pressure sensor according to an exemplary embodiment;

图8是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备的用于通过使用相机感测用户的大致触摸手势的操作的图;8 is a diagram illustrating an operation of an ultrasonic device for sensing a user's approximate touch gesture by using a camera, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图9是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备确定至少一个控制项目的透明度的方法的流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a method of determining transparency of at least one control item by an ultrasonic device according to an exemplary embodiment;

图10是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在主屏幕上将至少一个控制项目显示为透明的示例的图;FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device displays at least one control item as transparent on a home screen according to an exemplary embodiment;

图11是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在不显示超声波图像的区域上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符的方法的图;FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device displaying at least one control item and an indicator on a region where an ultrasonic image is not displayed, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图12是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在主屏幕的第一区域上显示超声波图像并且在主屏幕的第二区域上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符的示例的图;12 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasound device displays an ultrasound image on a first area of a home screen and displays at least one control item and an indicator on a second area of the home screen, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图13是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备通过使用多个显示单元提供信息的方法的流程图;13 is a flowchart illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device providing information by using a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment;

图14是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在主屏幕上显示在触摸屏上显示的一些控制项目的示例的图;FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device displays some control items displayed on a touch screen on a home screen according to an exemplary embodiment;

图15是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备显示对应于从至少一个控制项目选择的特定控制项目的窗口的方法的流程图;15 is a flowchart illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device displaying a window corresponding to a specific control item selected from at least one control item, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图16是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备根据拖动手势移动指示符的示例的图;FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device moves an indicator according to a drag gesture, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图17是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备基于触摸结束事件来选择特定控制项目的示例的图;FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device selects a specific control item based on a touch end event, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图18是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备显示对应于所选择的控制项目的窗口的方法的图;FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a method for an ultrasonic device to display a window corresponding to a selected control item according to an exemplary embodiment;

图19是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备根据用户的触摸手势来改变指示符的位置或选择控制项目的方法的图;FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device changing a position of an indicator or selecting a control item according to a user's touch gesture, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图20A至20D是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备根据通过触摸屏接收的用户的触摸手势来选择特定控制项目并在主屏幕上显示与该特定控制项目相对应的窗口的示例的图;20A to 20D are diagrams illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device selects a specific control item according to a user's touch gesture received through a touch screen and displays a window corresponding to the specific control item on a home screen, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图21A至21C是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备根据用户的悬停手势来移动指示符并根据用户的触摸手势来选择控制项目的示例的图;21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device moves an indicator according to a user's hover gesture and selects a control item according to a user's touch gesture, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图22是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在多个显示单元上显示不同显示种类的控制项目的方法的流程图;FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a method for an ultrasonic device to display control items of different display types on a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment;

图23A至23C是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备显示用于将灰度图的水平设置为在第一显示单元和第二显示单元上不同的控制项目的示例的图;23A to 23C are diagrams illustrating an example in which an ultrasound apparatus displays a control item for setting a level of a grayscale image to be different on a first display unit and a second display unit according to an exemplary embodiment;

图24A至24C是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备显示用于将频率设置为在第一显示单元和第二显示单元上不同的控制项目的示例的图;24A to 24C are diagrams illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device displays control items for setting a frequency to be different on a first display unit and a second display unit according to an exemplary embodiment;

图25是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备通过使用多个显示单元提供关于增益值设置的信息的方法的流程图;25 is a flowchart illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device providing information on gain value settings by using a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment;

图26A和26B是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在触摸屏上提供增益设置窗口并在主屏幕上显示增益线的示例的图;26A and 26B are diagrams illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device provides a gain setting window on a touch screen and displays a gain line on a home screen, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图27是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备基于触摸手势的种类来确定输入模式的方法的流程图;27 is a flowchart illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device determining an input mode based on a type of a touch gesture according to an exemplary embodiment;

图28A和28B是根据示例性实施例的深度选择模式的图;28A and 28B are diagrams of a depth selection mode according to an exemplary embodiment;

图29A和29C是根据示例性实施例的增益改变模式的图;29A and 29C are diagrams of gain changing modes according to an exemplary embodiment;

图30是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备基于触摸手势的种类确定与TGC相关的输入模式的示例的图;30 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device determines an input mode related to TGC based on a type of a touch gesture according to an exemplary embodiment;

图31是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备基于触摸手势的种类确定与LGC相关的输入模式的示例的图;31 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device determines an input mode related to an LGC based on a type of a touch gesture according to an exemplary embodiment;

图32是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备提供与预定的增益值集合对应的增益线的方法的流程图;32 is a flowchart illustrating a method for an ultrasonic device to provide a gain line corresponding to a predetermined set of gain values according to an exemplary embodiment;

图33A至33C是示出根据示例性实施例的提供关于由用户经由触摸屏和主屏幕选择的预定增益值集合的信息的示例的图;33A to 33C are diagrams illustrating an example of providing information on a predetermined gain value set selected by a user via a touch screen and a home screen, according to an exemplary embodiment;

图34是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在多个显示单元上显示增益线的方法的流程图;34 is a flowchart illustrating a method of an ultrasonic device displaying gain lines on a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment;

图35A和35F是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备在触摸屏和主屏幕上显示增益线的示例的图;以及35A and 35F are diagrams illustrating an example in which an ultrasonic device displays gain lines on a touch screen and a home screen according to an exemplary embodiment; and

图36和37是根据示例性实施例的超声波设备的框图。36 and 37 are block diagrams of ultrasonic devices according to exemplary embodiments.

具体实施方式detailed description

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,超声波设备包括:第一显示器,配置为显示超声波图像;控制面板,包括与第一显示器不同的并且配置为显示与超声波图像相关的多个控制项目的第二显示器;以及控制器,配置为基于位于第二显示器上的输入工具的位置从多个控制项目中选择至少一个控制项目,并且控制第一显示器与超声波图像一起显示所选择的至少一个控制项目和表示输入工具的位置的指示符。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, an ultrasound device includes: a first display configured to display an ultrasound image; a control panel including a second display different from the first display and configured to display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image and a controller configured to select at least one control item from a plurality of control items based on the position of the input tool located on the second display, and control the first display to display the selected at least one control item and represent the input together with the ultrasonic image An indicator of the location of the tool.

超声波设备还可以包括至少一个传感器,其配置为感测位于第二显示器上的输入工具的位置。The ultrasound device may also include at least one sensor configured to sense a position of the input tool located on the second display.

至少一个传感器可以包括从触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外线传感器中选择的至少一个。The at least one sensor may include at least one selected from a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor.

控制器还可以配置为基于至少一个控制项目是否在距离输入工具的位置的预定距离内显示来选择该至少一个控制项目。The controller may be further configured to select at least one control item based on whether the at least one control item is displayed within a predetermined distance from the position of the input tool.

控制器还可以配置为通过从显示在第二显示单元上的多个菜单组中选择与输入工具的位置相对应的菜单组来选择至少一个控制项目。The controller may be further configured to select at least one control item by selecting a menu group corresponding to a position of the input tool from among a plurality of menu groups displayed on the second display unit.

控制器还可以配置为在至少一个控制项目上显示指示符。The controller may also be configured to display an indicator on at least one control item.

控制器还可以配置为当输入工具在第二显示器上的位置改变时改变在第一显示器上显示的指示符的位置。The controller may be further configured to change the position of the indicator displayed on the first display when the position of the input tool on the second display is changed.

超声波图像可以包括经由探头获取的实时超声波图像。Ultrasound images may include real-time ultrasound images acquired via the probe.

第一显示器还可以被配置为显示至少一个控制项目和表示输入工具的位置的指示符,使得由第一显示器显示的至少一个控制项目和指示符覆盖超声波图像。The first display may be further configured to display at least one control item and an indicator representing a position of the input tool such that the at least one control item and indicator displayed by the first display overlay the ultrasonic image.

控制器还可以配置为基于预定义的透明度信息来确定在超声波图像上显示的至少一个控制项目的透明度。The controller may also be configured to determine transparency of at least one control item displayed on the ultrasound image based on predefined transparency information.

控制器还可以配置为在第一显示器的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且在第一显示器的第二区域上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符。The controller may also be configured to display the ultrasound image on the first area of the first display, and display at least one control item and indicator on the second area of the first display.

控制器还可以配置为经由第二显示器接收用于从至少一个控制项目中选择一个控制项目的第一输入,并且用于选择控制项目的第一输入可以不同于用于改变指示符的位置的第二输入。The controller may also be configured to receive a first input for selecting one control item from at least one control item via the second display, and the first input for selecting the control item may be different from the second input for changing the position of the indicator. Two inputs.

控制器还可以配置为在第一显示单元上显示与所选择的控制项目对应的窗口。The controller may also be configured to display a window corresponding to the selected control item on the first display unit.

控制器还可以配置为在第二显示器的预定区域上显示在第一显示器上显示的超声波图像。The controller may also be configured to display the ultrasonic image displayed on the first display on a predetermined area of the second display.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,经由超声波设备提供信息的方法,该方法包括:在第一显示器上显示超声波图像;在包括在控制面板中的第二显示器上显示与超声波图像相关的多个控制项目;基于位于第二显示器上的输入工具的位置从多个控制项目中选择至少一个控制项目;以及在第一显示器上与超声波图像一起显示所选择的至少一个控制项目和表示输入工具的位置的指示符。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, a method of providing information via an ultrasound device, the method includes: displaying an ultrasound image on a first display; displaying a plurality of controls related to the ultrasound image on a second display included in a control panel Items; selecting at least one control item from a plurality of control items based on the position of the input tool located on the second display; and displaying the selected at least one control item and an image representing the position of the input tool on the first display together with the ultrasound image indicator.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,超声波设备包括:第一显示器,配置为显示超声波图像;控制面板,包括与第一显示器不同的并且配置为显示与超声波图像相关的多个控制项目的第二显示器;以及控制器,配置为基于输入工具触摸第二显示器的位置从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目,确定与在第二显示器上显示第一控制项目的第一显示格式不同的第二显示格式,并且控制第一显示器以第二显示格式显示所选择的第一控制项目。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, an ultrasound device includes: a first display configured to display an ultrasound image; a control panel including a second display different from the first display and configured to display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image and a controller configured to select a first control item from a plurality of control items based on a position where the input tool touches the second display, and determine a second display that is different from a first display format for displaying the first control item on the second display format, and control the first display to display the selected first control item in the second display format.

当与第一显示格式相比时,第二显示格式可以被简化,即可能具有较少的复杂性。The second display format may be simplified, ie may have less complexity, when compared to the first display format.

控制器还可以配置为感测输入工具触摸以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的位置,并且将表示输入工具的位置的指示符显示在以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上。The controller may be further configured to sense a position where the input tool touches the first control item displayed in the first display format, and display an indicator representing the position of the input tool on the first control item displayed in the second display format.

控制器还可以配置为当输入工具触摸以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的位置改变时移动以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上显示的指示符。The controller may be further configured to move the indicator displayed on the first control item displayed in the second display format when a position where the input tool touches the first control item displayed in the first display format changes.

控制器还可以配置为接收以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目上的拖动输入,并且改变以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上显示的指示符的位置。The controller may be further configured to receive a drag input on the first control item displayed in the first display format, and change a position of the indicator displayed on the first control item displayed in the second display format.

当控制器感测到触摸在第二显示器上以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的触摸输入时,控制器还可以配置为在第一显示器上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目,同时继续在第二显示器上以第一显示格式显示第一控制项目。When the controller senses a touch input touching the first control item displayed on the second display in the first display format, the controller may be further configured to display the first control item on the first display in the second display format, Meanwhile, the first control item continues to be displayed on the second display in the first display format.

第一显示器还可以配置为以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目,使得显示在第一显示器上的第一控制项目覆盖超声波图像。The first display may also be configured to display the first control item in a second display format such that the first control item displayed on the first display overlays the ultrasonic image.

第一显示器还可以配置为在第一显示器的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且在第一显示器的第二区域上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目。The first display may also be configured to display the ultrasound image on the first area of the first display, and to display the first control item in a second display format on the second area of the first display.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,提供了一种经由超声波设备提供信息的方法,该方法包括:在第一显示器上显示超声波图像;在包括在控制面板中的第二显示器上显示与超声波图像相关的多个控制项目;基于输入工具触摸第二显示器的位置从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目;确定与在第二显示器上显示第一控制项目的第一显示格式不同的第二显示格式;以及在第一显示器上与第一控制项目一起显示第二显示格式的第一控制项目。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, there is provided a method of providing information via an ultrasound device, the method comprising: displaying an ultrasound image on a first display; displaying an image related to the ultrasound image on a second display included in a control panel. a plurality of control items; select the first control item from the plurality of control items based on the position where the input tool touches the second display; determine a second display format different from the first display format for displaying the first control item on the second display ; and displaying the first control item in the second display format together with the first control item on the first display.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,超声波设备包括:第一显示器,配置为显示超声波图像;控制面板,包括第二显示器,第二显示器配置为显示多个滑动条,多个滑动条用于调整与第一区域上的超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值;以及控制器,配置为控制第一显示器与超声波图像一起显示增益线,其中,增益线通过基于输入工具触摸第二显示器的位置而连接与多个滑动条上的调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值来确定。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, an ultrasound device includes: a first display configured to display ultrasound images; a control panel including a second display configured to display a plurality of slide bars for adjusting and A gain value corresponding to a depth portion of the ultrasound image on the first area; and a controller configured to control the first display to display a gain line together with the ultrasound image, wherein the gain line is connected to the second display based on a position where the input tool touches the second display The positions of the adjustment buttons on the multiple slider bars correspond to the gain values to be determined.

控制器还可以配置为在第一显示器上显示的增益线上显示表示与输入工具在第一区域上的位置对应的深度部分的指示符。The controller may be further configured to display an indicator representing a depth portion corresponding to a position of the input tool on the first area on the gain line displayed on the first display.

控制器还可以配置为当输入工具的位置在第一区域内改变时移动在增益线上显示的指示符。The controller may also be configured to move the indicator displayed on the gain line when the position of the input tool changes within the first area.

控制器还可以配置为经由第二显示器接收用于移动多个滑动条上的调整按钮中的至少一个的输入,基于该输入移动至少一个调整按钮,以及基于已经移动的至少一个调整按钮的位置来改变在第一显示器上显示的增益线的形状。The controller may also be configured to receive, via the second display, an input for moving at least one of the adjustment buttons on the plurality of slider bars, move the at least one adjustment button based on the input, and move the at least one adjustment button based on the position of the at least one adjustment button that has been moved. Changes the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display.

控制器还可以配置为基于经由第二显示器感测的经由输入工具的触摸手势输入来确定输入模式,并且输入模式可以包括用于从超声波图像的深度部分中选择一个深度部分的深度选择模式和用于改变增益值的增益改变模式。The controller may be further configured to determine an input mode based on a touch gesture input via the input tool sensed via the second display, and the input mode may include a depth selection mode for selecting one depth portion from among depth portions of the ultrasound image and a Gain change mode for changing the gain value.

控制器还可以配置为当输入工具的触摸手势是单手指手势时确定输入模式是深度选择模式,并且当输入工具的触摸手势是多手指手势时确定输入模式是增益改变模式。The controller may be further configured to determine that the input mode is the depth selection mode when the touch gesture of the input tool is a single-finger gesture, and determine that the input mode is the gain change mode when the touch gesture of the input tool is a multi-finger gesture.

控制器还可以配置为响应于在手指与第一区域接触的同时向上或向下拖动手指的第一拖动手势来将显示在增益线上的指示符移动到第一深度部分,响应于在至少两个手指与第一区域接触的同时在左右方向上拖动所述至少两个手指的第二拖动手势来调整第一深度部分的增益值,并且基于所调整的增益值来改变在第一显示器上显示的增益线的形状。The controller may be further configured to move the indicator displayed on the gain line to the first depth portion in response to a first drag gesture of dragging the finger up or down while the finger is in contact with the first area, The second drag gesture of dragging the at least two fingers in the left and right direction while the at least two fingers are in contact with the first area adjusts the gain value of the first depth part, and changes the gain value of the first depth part based on the adjusted gain value. The shape of the gain line shown on a monitor.

控制器还可以配置为经由第二显示器接收用于选择多个预设增益值集合中的一个的输入,并且根据所选择的预设增益值集合来移动多个滑动条上的调整按钮中的至少一个调整按钮。The controller may also be configured to receive an input for selecting one of a plurality of preset gain value sets via the second display, and move at least one of the adjustment buttons on the plurality of slide bars according to the selected preset gain value set. An adjustment button.

控制器可以在第一显示器上显示与所选择的预设增益值集合对应的增益线。The controller may display a gain line corresponding to the selected set of preset gain values on the first display.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,一种经由超声波设备提供信息的方法,该方法包括:在第一显示器上显示超声波图像;在包括在控制面板中的第二显示器上显示多个滑动条,多个滑动条用于调整与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值;以及在第一显示器上与超声波图像一起显示增益线,其中,增益线通过基于输入工具触摸第二显示器的位置而连接与多个滑动条上的调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值来确定。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, a method of providing information via an ultrasound device, the method includes: displaying an ultrasound image on a first display; displaying a plurality of slide bars on a second display included in a control panel, multiple a slider bar for adjusting the gain value corresponding to the depth portion of the ultrasound image; and displaying a gain line on the first display together with the ultrasound image, wherein the gain line is connected to a plurality of the second display by touching the position of the second display based on the input tool The position of the adjustment button on the slider bar corresponds to the gain value determined.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,超声波设备包括:第一显示器,配置为显示超声波图像;控制面板,包括与第一显示器不同并且配置为显示第一增益线的第二显示器,第一增益线用于设置与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值;以及控制器,配置为基于触摸第二显示器上显示的第一增益线的触摸输入,控制第一显示器与超声波图像一起显示第二增益线,其中,第一显示器上显示的第二增益线对应于第二显示器上显示的第一增益线。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, an ultrasound device includes: a first display configured to display an ultrasound image; a control panel including a second display different from the first display and configured to display a first gain line for for setting a gain value corresponding to the depth portion of the ultrasonic image; and a controller configured to control the first display to display the second gain line together with the ultrasonic image based on a touch input of touching the first gain line displayed on the second display, wherein , the second gain line displayed on the first display corresponds to the first gain line displayed on the second display.

控制器还可以配置为响应于触摸第二显示器上显示的第一增益线的触摸输入而提取由第一增益线的点表示的多个增益值,并且基于所提取的多个增益值来生成第二增益线。The controller may be further configured to extract a plurality of gain values represented by points of the first gain line in response to a touch input of touching the first gain line displayed on the second display, and generate a second gain value based on the extracted plurality of gain values. Two gain lines.

控制器还可以配置为基于在第一显示器上显示的超声波图像的整体深度值来确定第二增益线的长度。The controller may also be configured to determine the length of the second gain line based on the overall depth value of the ultrasound image displayed on the first display.

第一显示器还可以配置为在超声波图像的一侧显示第二增益线,使得由第二增益线的点表示的深度值对应于超声波图像的深度值。The first display may also be configured to display a second gain line on one side of the ultrasound image such that depth values represented by points of the second gain line correspond to depth values of the ultrasound image.

控制器还可以配置为在第一显示器上显示第二增益线,使得第二增益线的最高点对应于超声波图像的最低深度值,并且第二增益线的最低点对应于超声波图像的最高深度值。The controller may also be configured to display a second gain line on the first display such that the highest point of the second gain line corresponds to the lowest depth value of the ultrasound image, and the lowest point of the second gain line corresponds to the highest depth value of the ultrasound image .

第一增益线和第二增益线可以通过连接与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值而获得。The first gain line and the second gain line may be obtained by connecting gain values corresponding to the depth portion of the ultrasound image.

第一显示器还可以配置为在第一显示器的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且在第一显示器的第二区域上显示第二增益线。The first display may also be configured to display an ultrasound image on a first area of the first display, and to display a second gain line on a second area of the first display.

控制器还可以配置为在第二增益线上显示表示第一增益线上的触摸位置的指示符。The controller may also be configured to display an indicator representing the touch position on the first gain line on the second gain line.

控制器还可以配置为当第一增益线上的触摸位置改变时,移动在第二增益线上显示的指示符。The controller may also be configured to move the indicator displayed on the second gain line when the touch position on the first gain line changes.

当控制器接收到用于经由第一增益线将对应于第一增益线的第一增益值集合改变为第二增益值集合的输入时,控制器还可以配置为基于第二增益值集合来改变在第一显示器上显示的第二增益线的形状。When the controller receives an input for changing the first set of gain values corresponding to the first gain line to the second set of gain values via the first gain line, the controller may also be configured to change the The shape of the second gain line displayed on the first display.

当第一增益线上的触摸输入结束时,控制器还可以配置为停止显示第二增益线。When the touch input on the first gain line ends, the controller may also be configured to stop displaying the second gain line.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,提供了一种经由超声波设备提供信息的方法,该方法包括:在第一显示器上显示超声波图像;在包括在控制面板中的第二显示器上显示第一增益线,第一增益线用于设置与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值;以及基于在第二显示器上显示的第一增益线的触摸输入,在第一显示器上与超声波图像一起显示第二增益线,其中,第一显示器上显示的第二增益线对应于第二显示器上显示的第一增益线。According to an aspect of an exemplary embodiment, there is provided a method of providing information via an ultrasound device, the method comprising: displaying an ultrasound image on a first display; displaying a first gain line on a second display included in a control panel , the first gain line is used to set the gain value corresponding to the depth portion of the ultrasonic image; and based on the touch input of the first gain line displayed on the second display, the second gain line is displayed on the first display together with the ultrasonic image , wherein the second gain line displayed on the first display corresponds to the first gain line displayed on the second display.

根据示例性实施例的一个方面,提供了包括指令的非临时计算机可读介质。指令可由处理器执行以实现:在第一显示器上显示超声波图像;在与第一显示器分离的控制面板的第二显示器上显示配置为控制以调整超声波图像的多个控制项目;基于与第二显示器对应的输入工具的位置,从多个控制项目中选择至少一个控制项目;以及控制第一显示器以与超声波图像一起显示所选择的至少一个控制项目和表示输入工具的位置的指示符。According to one aspect of an exemplary embodiment, a non-transitory computer-readable medium including instructions is provided. The instructions can be executed by the processor to realize: displaying the ultrasonic image on the first display; displaying a plurality of control items configured to control to adjust the ultrasonic image on the second display of the control panel separated from the first display; Selecting at least one control item from a plurality of control items corresponding to the position of the input tool; and controlling the first display to display the selected at least one control item and an indicator representing the position of the input tool together with the ultrasonic image.

指令可以由处理器执行以进一步实现:通过传感器检测与第二显示器对应的输入工具的位置。The instructions may be executed by the processor to further realize: detecting the position of the input tool corresponding to the second display through the sensor.

所述至少一个传感器可以包括从触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外线传感器中选择的至少一个。The at least one sensor may include at least one selected from a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor.

指令可以由处理器执行以进一步实现:基于至少一个控制项目是否在距离输入工具的位置的预定距离内显示来选择该至少一个控制项目。The instructions are executable by the processor to further select at least one control item based on whether the at least one control item is displayed within a predetermined distance from the location of the input tool.

发明模式invention model

包括本文使用的描述性或技术术语的所有术语应被解释为具有本领域普通技术人员所理解的含义。然而,根据本领域普通技术人员的意图、先例或新技术的出现,术语也可以具有不同的含义。一些术语可以由申请人任意选择,在这种情况下,将在本说明书的详细描述中详细描述所选项的含义。因此,本文使用的术语必须基于术语的含义以及整个说明书中的描述来定义。All terms including descriptive or technical terms used herein should be interpreted to have meanings understood by those of ordinary skill in the art. However, the terms may also have different meanings according to the intention of those of ordinary skill in the art, precedents, or the appearance of new technologies. Some terms may be arbitrarily selected by the applicant, in this case, the meaning of the selected items will be described in detail in the detailed description of this specification. Therefore, the terms used herein must be defined based on the meanings of the terms and the descriptions throughout the specification.

在整个说明书中,还将理解,当组件“包括”元件时,除非另有相反的描述,否则应当理解,该组件不排除另外的元件并且可以进一步包括另一元件。此外,诸如“...单元”,“...模块”等术语是指执行至少一个功能或操作的单元,并且单元可以被实现为硬件或软件,或者硬件和软件的组合。如本文所用,术语“和/或”包括一个或多个相关列出的项目的任何和所有组合。在元件列表之前的诸如“至少一个”的表达修饰整个元件列表,并且不修饰列表的单独元件。Throughout the specification, it will also be understood that when a component "comprises" an element, unless otherwise stated to the contrary, it should be understood that the component does not exclude another element and may further include another element. In addition, terms such as "...unit", "...module" and the like refer to a unit that performs at least one function or operation, and a unit may be implemented as hardware or software, or a combination of hardware and software. As used herein, the term "and/or" includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. Expressions such as "at least one" preceding a list of elements modify the entire list of elements and do not modify the individual elements of the list.

在整个说明书中,“超声波图像”表示通过使用超声波信号获得的对象的图像。在说明书中,“对象”可以包括人、动物或者人或动物的一部分。例如,对象可以是器官(例如,肝脏,心脏,子宫,脑,乳房或腹部)、血管或其组合。对象可以包括模型。模型是指具有非常接近生物体的密度和有效原子序数的体积的材料,并且可以包括具有与身体相似的特征的球体模型。Throughout the specification, an "ultrasonic image" means an image of a subject obtained by using ultrasonic signals. In the specification, "subject" may include a human, an animal, or a part of a human or an animal. For example, an object can be an organ (eg, liver, heart, uterus, brain, breast, or abdomen), a blood vessel, or a combination thereof. Objects can include models. A phantom refers to a material having a density and effective atomic number volume very close to that of a living organism, and may include a sphere phantom having characteristics similar to a body.

在整个说明书中,“用户”可以是但不限于医疗专家,包括医生,护士,医学实验室技术人员和超声检查员。Throughout this specification, a "user" may be, but is not limited to, a medical professional, including doctors, nurses, medical laboratory technicians, and sonographers.

现在将详细参考在附图中示出的示例性实施例。在这方面,示例性实施例可以具有不同的形式,并且不应被解释为限于本文所阐述的描述。在下面的描述中,未详细描述公知的功能或结构,因为它们将以不必要的细节掩盖示例性实施例。在整个说明书中,相同的附图标记表示相同的元件。Reference will now be made in detail to the exemplary embodiments illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In this regard, exemplary embodiments may have different forms and should not be construed as being limited to the descriptions set forth herein. In the following description, well-known functions or constructions are not described in detail since they would obscure the exemplary embodiments with unnecessary detail. Throughout the specification, the same reference numerals denote the same elements.

图1是根据示例性实施例的包括多个显示单元的超声波设备1000的图。FIG. 1 is a diagram of an ultrasound apparatus 1000 including a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment.

参考图1,根据示例性实施例的超声波设备1000可以包括第一显示单元100(例如,显示器、监视器等),输入设备1600和用于连接到探头20的接口。这里,输入装置1600可以包括显示图形用户界面(GUI)的第二显示单元200(例如,显示器、监视器等)和包括硬件按钮的控制面板300。以下,将对超声波设备1000的各个元件进行详细说明。第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200可以独立地或分开地操作,彼此不同或分离。根据示例性实施例,控制面板300可以包括显示图形用户界面(GUI)的第二显示单元200。Referring to FIG. 1 , an ultrasound apparatus 1000 according to an exemplary embodiment may include a first display unit 100 (eg, a display, a monitor, etc.), an input device 1600 and an interface for connecting to a probe 20 . Here, the input device 1600 may include a second display unit 200 (eg, a display, a monitor, etc.) displaying a Graphical User Interface (GUI) and a control panel 300 including hardware buttons. Hereinafter, each element of the ultrasonic device 1000 will be described in detail. The first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 may independently or separately operate, be different from or separate from each other. According to an exemplary embodiment, the control panel 300 may include a second display unit 200 displaying a Graphical User Interface (GUI).

根据示例性实施例,第一显示单元100可以是显示对象的超声波图像或信息的主屏幕。用户可以经由显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像来识别对象10的状态。例如,用户可以通过显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像来检测损伤或者可以识别胚胎的健康状态。According to an exemplary embodiment, the first display unit 100 may be a main screen displaying ultrasound images or information of a subject. A user may recognize the state of the object 10 via the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 . For example, a user may detect damage or may recognize a healthy state of an embryo through an ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,第一显示单元100可以连接到超声波设备1000的本体。这里,将第一显示单元100和超声波设备1000的本体彼此连接的连接部分可以是可旋转的。用户可以旋转用于将第一显示单元100连接到本体的连接部分,以便调整超声波设备1000的本体(或本体的参考轴线)与第一显示单元100之间的角度。According to an exemplary embodiment, the first display unit 100 may be connected to the body of the ultrasonic device 1000 . Here, a connection part connecting the first display unit 100 and the body of the ultrasonic device 1000 to each other may be rotatable. A user may rotate a connecting portion for connecting the first display unit 100 to the body in order to adjust an angle between the body of the ultrasonic device 1000 (or a reference axis of the body) and the first display unit 100 .

例如,用户可以旋转用于将第一显示单元100连接到本体的连接部分,以便在用他/她的手保持探头20并将探头20放在对象的腹部的状态下识别经由探头20获取的超声波图像而不转动他/她的头部。如果包括第一显示单元100的超声波设备1000位于用户的左侧,并且对象10位于用户的右侧,则用户可以将连接部分以逆时针方向旋转30°的角度,以便将第一显示单元100调整为面对对象10。For example, the user may rotate the connecting part for connecting the first display unit 100 to the body to recognize the ultrasonic wave acquired via the probe 20 in a state of holding the probe 20 with his/her hand and placing the probe 20 on the subject's abdomen. image without turning his/her head. If the ultrasonic device 1000 including the first display unit 100 is located on the left side of the user, and the object 10 is located on the right side of the user, the user can rotate the connecting part at an angle of 30° in the counterclockwise direction in order to adjust the first display unit 100 For facing object 10.

根据示例性实施例的第一显示单元100可以包括从液晶显示器(LCD),薄膜晶体管(TFT)-LCD,有机发光二极管(OLED),柔性显示器和三维(3D)显示器中选择的至少一个,但不限于此。第一显示单元100可以包括触摸面板(例如,电容覆盖型,电阻覆盖型,红外光束型,表面声波型,积分应变计型和压电型)。The first display unit 100 according to the exemplary embodiment may include at least one selected from a liquid crystal display (LCD), a thin film transistor (TFT)-LCD, an organic light emitting diode (OLED), a flexible display, and a three-dimensional (3D) display, but Not limited to this. The first display unit 100 may include a touch panel (eg, capacitive overlay type, resistive overlay type, infrared beam type, surface acoustic wave type, integral strain gauge type, and piezoelectric type).

根据示例性实施例的输入装置1600是用户输入用于控制超声波设备1000的数据的单元。例如,输入装置1600可以包括用于显示GUI的第二显示单元200,以及包括硬件按钮的控制面板300。The input device 1600 according to an exemplary embodiment is a unit for a user to input data for controlling the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 . For example, the input device 1600 may include a second display unit 200 for displaying a GUI, and a control panel 300 including hardware buttons.

根据示例性实施例,第二显示单元200可以包括触摸屏。例如,第二显示单元200和触摸板可以被分层以形成触摸屏。然后,第二显示单元200可以用作输入装置。According to an exemplary embodiment, the second display unit 200 may include a touch screen. For example, the second display unit 200 and the touch pad may be layered to form a touch screen. Then, the second display unit 200 may be used as an input device.

触摸屏可以配置为检测触摸输入的压力以及触摸输入位置和触摸区域。触摸屏可以配置为检测接近触摸以及真实触摸。The touch screen can be configured to detect pressure of touch input as well as touch input location and touch area. The touchscreen can be configured to detect proximity touches as well as real touches.

在本说明书中,“真实触摸”表示指示物400真正触摸触摸屏的情况,“接近触摸”表示指示物400未实际触摸触摸屏但以预定的间隔接近触摸屏的情况。在整个说明书中,指示物400是用于触摸或接近显示屏幕上的特定点的触摸工具,例如电子笔,手指等。为了便于描述,指示物400是手指的示例将在下面描述。另外,指示物400可以被称为输入工具。In this specification, "real touch" means a case where the pointer 400 really touches the touch screen, and "proximity touch" means a case where the pointer 400 does not actually touch the touch screen but approaches the touch screen at predetermined intervals. Throughout the specification, the pointer 400 is a touch tool for touching or approaching a specific point on the display screen, such as an electronic pen, a finger, and the like. For convenience of description, an example in which the pointer 400 is a finger will be described below. Also, the pointer 400 may be called an input tool.

超声波设备1000可以包括触摸屏中或触摸屏周围的各种传感器,以便感测或检测触摸屏上的真实触摸或接近触摸。用于感测触摸屏上的触摸的传感器的示例可以包括触觉传感器。The ultrasonic device 1000 may include various sensors in or around the touch screen in order to sense or detect a real touch or a proximity touch on the touch screen. Examples of sensors for sensing touch on the touch screen may include tactile sensors.

触觉传感器感测特定材料以人类可以感觉的或更大的强度的接触。触觉传感器可以感测各种信息,例如接触表面的粗糙度,接触材料的坚固性或坚硬性,接触点处的温度等。A tactile sensor senses contact of a particular material with an intensity that a human can feel or greater. Tactile sensors can sense various information such as the roughness of the contact surface, the firmness or hardness of the contact material, the temperature at the contact point, etc.

用于感测触摸屏上的触摸的传感器的示例可以是接近传感器。接近传感器是用于通过使用没有实际物理触摸的电磁场或红外线的力来检测对象是否接近检测表面或外部对象是否存在于附近的传感器。An example of a sensor for sensing a touch on a touch screen may be a proximity sensor. A proximity sensor is a sensor for detecting whether an object approaches a detection surface or whether an external object exists nearby by using the force of an electromagnetic field or infrared rays without actual physical touch.

接近传感器的实例包括透明光电传感器,直接反射光电传感器,镜面反射光电传感器,高频振荡光电传感器,电容式光电传感器,磁光电传感器,红外光电传感器等。Examples of proximity sensors include transparent photoelectric sensors, direct reflection photoelectric sensors, mirror reflection photoelectric sensors, high frequency oscillation photoelectric sensors, capacitive photoelectric sensors, magnetophotoelectric sensors, infrared photoelectric sensors, etc.

根据示例性实施例,第二显示单元200可以经由触摸屏感测用户的触摸手势。在本说明书中,用户的触摸手势(触摸输入)可以包括点击,触摸并保持,双击,拖动,平移,轻弹,拖放,滑动,捏合等。According to an exemplary embodiment, the second display unit 200 may sense a user's touch gesture via the touch screen. In this specification, the user's touch gesture (touch input) may include tap, touch and hold, double tap, drag, pan, flick, drag and drop, slide, pinch, and the like.

“点击”是指用户通过使用手指或电子笔触摸屏幕,然后从屏幕提升手指或电子笔而不在屏幕上移动的操作。"Tap" refers to an operation in which a user touches a screen with a finger or an electronic pen, and then lifts the finger or the electronic pen from the screen without moving on the screen.

“触摸并保持”是用户通过使用手指或电子笔触摸屏幕并且将触摸输入保持临界时间长度(例如两秒)或更长时间的操作。也就是说,触进时间和触出时间之间的时间差等于或大于临界时间长度(例如,两秒)。为了使用户能够识别触摸输入是点击操作还是触摸并保持操作,当触摸输入保持临界时间长度或更长时,发送视觉、听觉或触觉反馈信号。临界时间长度可以根据示例性实施例而变化。"Touch and hold" is an operation in which a user touches a screen by using a finger or an electronic pen and holds the touch input for a critical length of time (for example, two seconds) or longer. That is, the time difference between the touch-in time and the touch-out time is equal to or greater than a critical time length (eg, two seconds). In order to enable the user to recognize whether the touch input is a tap operation or a touch and hold operation, when the touch input is held for a critical length of time or longer, a visual, auditory or tactile feedback signal is sent. The critical length of time may vary according to exemplary embodiments.

“双击”是用户通过使用手指或电子笔触摸屏幕两次的操作。"Double tap" is an operation in which a user touches the screen twice by using a finger or an electronic pen.

“拖动”是用户通过手指或电子笔触摸屏幕,然后在连续触摸屏幕的同时将手指或电子笔移动到屏幕上的另一个位置的操作。对象被移动或通过拖动操作执行将在后面描述的平移操作。"Dragging" is an operation in which a user touches the screen with a finger or an electronic pen, and then moves the finger or the electronic pen to another position on the screen while continuously touching the screen. The object is moved or a translation operation to be described later is performed by a drag operation.

“平移”是用户在不选择对象的情况下执行拖动操作的操作。由于用户在平移操作中没有选择特定对象,所以页面本身在屏幕中移动或一组对象在页面中移动,而不移动页面中的特定对象。"Panning" is an operation in which the user performs a drag operation without selecting an object. Since the user does not select a specific object in the panning operation, the page itself moves across the screen or a group of objects moves across the page without moving specific objects within the page.

“轻弹”是用户以临界速度(例如,100像素/秒)或更快地拖动手指或电子笔的操作。可以基于手指或电子笔的速度是否为临界速度(例如,100像素/秒)以上来区分拖动操作(或平移操作)和轻弹操作。A "flick" is an operation in which a user drags a finger or an electronic pen at a critical speed (for example, 100 pixels/second) or faster. A drag operation (or pan operation) and a flick operation can be distinguished based on whether the speed of the finger or the electronic pen is above a critical speed (for example, 100 pixels/second).

“拖放”是用户通过使用手指或电子笔在屏幕上的预定位置拖动和放开对象的操作。"Drag and drop" is an operation in which a user drags and drops an object at a predetermined position on a screen by using a finger or an electronic pen.

“捏合”是用户通过使用两个手指触摸屏幕,然后将手指彼此移动到不同方向的操作。捏合操作是用于扩展(捏开)或缩小(夹紧)对象或页面的手势,并且扩展值或缩小值可以由两个手指之间的距离确定。"Pinching" is an operation in which a user touches the screen with two fingers and then moves the fingers in different directions relative to each other. A pinch operation is a gesture for expanding (pinch-out) or shrinking (pinching) an object or a page, and the expansion or reduction value can be determined by the distance between two fingers.

“滑动”是在触摸屏幕上的对象的状态下用户将手指或电子笔在水平或垂直方向上移动预定距离的操作。对角线方向的移动可能不被视为滑动事件。"Swiping" is an operation in which a user moves a finger or an electronic pen by a predetermined distance in a horizontal or vertical direction in a state of touching an object on the screen. Movement in a diagonal direction may not be considered a swipe event.

此外,根据示例性实施例的第二显示单元200可以包括多个控制项目。多个控制项目是用户可选择的项目,例如菜单,调整按钮,模式选择按钮,快捷图标,调整界面,功能键,设置窗口等,但不限于此。Also, the second display unit 200 according to an exemplary embodiment may include a plurality of control items. A plurality of control items are user-selectable items, such as menus, adjustment buttons, mode selection buttons, shortcut icons, adjustment interfaces, function keys, setting windows, etc., but not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,多个控制项目中的每一个可以与至少一个功能相关联。例如,多个控制项目可以包括二维(2D)按钮,3D按钮,四维(4D)按钮,颜色按钮,PW按钮,M按钮,sonoview按钮(用于识别先前存储的图像的按钮),更多按钮,测量按钮,注释按钮,活检按钮(用于引导针的插入点的按钮),深度按钮,聚焦按钮,增益按钮,频率按钮等,但不限于此。本领域普通技术人员可以从按钮的名称容易地推导出每个按钮的功能,因此这里省略关于按钮的详细描述。According to an exemplary embodiment, each of the plurality of control items may be associated with at least one function. For example, multiple control items can include a two-dimensional (2D) button, a 3D button, a four-dimensional (4D) button, a color button, a PW button, an M button, a sonoview button (a button for recognizing a previously stored image), a more button , a measurement button, an annotation button, a biopsy button (a button used to guide the insertion point of a needle), a depth button, a focus button, a gain button, a frequency button, etc., but not limited thereto. A person of ordinary skill in the art can easily deduce the function of each button from the name of the button, so a detailed description about the buttons is omitted here.

根据示例性实施例,控制面板300可以包括硬件按钮(物理按钮)。例如,控制面板300可以包括硬件按钮,例如轨迹球,探头按钮,电源按钮,扫描按钮,患者按钮,超声波图像选择按钮等,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the control panel 300 may include hardware buttons (physical buttons). For example, the control panel 300 may include hardware buttons such as a trackball, a probe button, a power button, a scan button, a patient button, an ultrasound image selection button, etc., but is not limited thereto.

患者按钮是用于选择将被超声波图像诊断的患者的按钮,并且探头按钮是用于选择用于超声波图像诊断的探头的按钮。扫描按钮是通过使用超声波设备1000中预先设定的参数值集合来快速地校正超声波图像的按钮,存储按钮是用于存储超声波图像的按钮,超声波图像选择按钮是用于暂停实时显示的超声波图像的按钮,以在屏幕上显示静止超声波图像。The patient button is a button for selecting a patient to be diagnosed by ultrasonic images, and the probe button is a button for selecting a probe for ultrasonic image diagnosis. The scan button is a button for quickly correcting the ultrasound image by using a preset parameter value set in the ultrasound device 1000, the storage button is a button for storing the ultrasound image, and the ultrasound image selection button is for pausing the ultrasound image displayed in real time button to display a still ultrasound image on the screen.

根据示例性实施例,包括在控制面板300中的硬件按钮可以通过要在第二显示单元200上显示的软件来实现。例如,用于显示静止图像的冻结按钮可以作为控制面板300上的硬件按钮存在,并且可以作为第二显示单元200上的软件按钮存在。软件按钮可以是作为软件实现并显示在屏幕上的用户界面(UI)对象。例如,软件按钮可以包括显示在触摸屏上的图标,设置键,菜单等。与软件按钮匹配的功能可以通过用于触摸软件按钮的触摸输入来执行。According to an exemplary embodiment, hardware buttons included in the control panel 300 may be implemented by software to be displayed on the second display unit 200 . For example, a freeze button for displaying a still image may exist as a hardware button on the control panel 300 and may exist as a software button on the second display unit 200 . A software button may be a user interface (UI) object implemented as software and displayed on a screen. For example, software buttons may include icons displayed on a touch screen, setting keys, menus, and the like. A function matched with the software button can be executed by a touch input for touching the software button.

根据示例性实施例,从包括在(不包括触摸屏的)一般超声波设备的控制面板中的按钮之中,用户经常使用的一些按钮可以包括在控制面板300中作为硬件按钮,其他按钮可以设置在作为GUI的第二显示单元200的触摸屏上。According to an exemplary embodiment, among buttons included in a control panel of a general ultrasonic device (not including a touch screen), some buttons frequently used by users may be included in the control panel 300 as hardware buttons, and other buttons may be provided as hardware buttons. on the touch screen of the second display unit 200 of the GUI.

形成在控制面板300上的硬件按钮的情况下,用户可以通过使用触觉而容易地从硬件按钮中选择特定按钮,而不用看控制面板300。In the case of hardware buttons formed on the control panel 300 , the user can easily select a specific button from among the hardware buttons by using the sense of touch without looking at the control panel 300 .

然而,设置在触摸屏上的软件按钮的位置可能是可变的,因此用户难以在不看软件按钮的情况下识别软件按钮的位置。此外,用户可能难以通过触觉感觉来识别软件按钮之间的边界。因此,用户必须在触摸屏上识别手指的位置时选择显示在触摸屏上的特定软件按钮。However, the positions of the software buttons provided on the touch screen may be variable, and thus it is difficult for the user to recognize the positions of the software buttons without looking at the software buttons. Additionally, users may have difficulty identifying boundaries between software buttons through tactile sensation. Therefore, the user has to select a specific software button displayed on the touch screen while recognizing the position of the finger on the touch screen.

例如,为了使用户在执行超声波诊断(例如,扫描超声波图像)时选择显示在触摸屏上的按钮,用户必须将他/她的眼睛从显示在主屏幕上的超声波图像转移到触摸屏。在这种情况下,用户的眼睛可能在显示超声波图像的第一显示单元100和显示控制项目(例如,菜单)的第二显示单元200之间分散。For example, in order for a user to select a button displayed on the touch screen while performing ultrasound diagnosis (eg, scanning an ultrasound image), the user must shift his/her eyes from the ultrasound image displayed on the main screen to the touch screen. In this case, the user's eyes may be distracted between the first display unit 100 displaying the ultrasonic image and the second display unit 200 displaying control items (eg, menu).

因此,根据示例性实施例,显示在第二显示单元200上的一些或全部控制项目(例如菜单)基于指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置来显示在第一显示单元100,即主屏幕上,因此在执行超声波诊断期间用户的眼睛可以不分散。Therefore, according to an exemplary embodiment, some or all of the control items (such as menus) displayed on the second display unit 200 are displayed on the first display unit 100, ie, the main screen, based on the position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200. on, so the user's eyes may not be distracted during the performance of ultrasonic diagnosis.

此外,下面将描述第一显示单元100是显示超声波图像的主屏幕并且第二显示单元200是显示控制项目的触摸屏的示例。Also, an example in which the first display unit 100 is a main screen displaying ultrasound images and the second display unit 200 is a touch screen displaying control items will be described below.

尽管图1示出了彼此分离的第二显示单元200和控制面板300,但是一个或多个示例性实施例不限于此。在一些示例性实施例中,控制面板300可以包括第二显示单元200。Although FIG. 1 illustrates the second display unit 200 and the control panel 300 separated from each other, one or more exemplary embodiments are not limited thereto. In some exemplary embodiments, the control panel 300 may include the second display unit 200 .

此外,如果输入装置1600仅包括触摸屏,则控制面板300和第二显示单元200可以彼此一体地形成。下面将参照图2A描述整个控制面板300是触摸屏的情况。Also, if the input device 1600 includes only a touch screen, the control panel 300 and the second display unit 200 may be integrally formed with each other. A case where the entire control panel 300 is a touch screen will be described below with reference to FIG. 2A .

图2A是根据示例性实施例的包括完全是触摸屏的控制面板的超声波设备的图。2A is a diagram of an ultrasound device including a control panel that is entirely a touch screen, according to an exemplary embodiment.

参考图2A,整个控制面板300可以是触摸屏。在这种情况下,控制面板300可以表示第二显示单元200。因此,可以在控制面板300上显示软件按钮,而不是硬件按钮。例如,控制面板300可以显示至少一个控制项目。此外,控制面板300可以缩小显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像的比率,并且在其区域上显示缩小的超声波图像。Referring to FIG. 2A, the entire control panel 300 may be a touch screen. In this case, the control panel 300 may represent the second display unit 200 . Therefore, software buttons may be displayed on the control panel 300 instead of hardware buttons. For example, the control panel 300 may display at least one control item. In addition, the control panel 300 may reduce the ratio of the ultrasonic image displayed on the first display unit 100 and display the reduced ultrasonic image on its area.

根据示例性实施例,控制面板300可以在其一部分上包括轨迹球301。这里,当用户用他/她的手指旋转轨迹球301时,可以根据轨迹球301的移动来移动第一显示单元100上的光标。According to an exemplary embodiment, the control panel 300 may include a trackball 301 on a part thereof. Here, when the user rotates the trackball 301 with his/her finger, the cursor on the first display unit 100 may be moved according to the movement of the trackball 301 .

图1和2A作为示例示出了第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200附接到超声波设备1000的本体的情况,但是一个或多个示例性实施例不限于此。例如,下面将参照图2B描述第二显示单元200从超声波设备1000拆下的情况,并且下面将参照图3详细描述第一显示单元100存在于超声波设备1000外部的情况。1 and 2A illustrate a case where the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 are attached to the body of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 as an example, but one or more exemplary embodiments are not limited thereto. For example, a case where the second display unit 200 is detached from the ultrasound apparatus 1000 will be described below with reference to FIG. 2B , and a case where the first display unit 100 exists outside the ultrasound apparatus 1000 will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 3 .

图2B是根据示例性实施例的包括可拆下的显示单元的超声波设备1000的图。FIG. 2B is a diagram of an ultrasonic device 1000 including a detachable display unit, according to an exemplary embodiment.

参考图2B,超声波设备1000可以包括第一显示单元100,第二显示单元200和用于将第二显示单元200附接到超声波设备1000/从超声波设备1000拆下的保持器200'。Referring to FIG. 2B , the ultrasonic device 1000 may include a first display unit 100 , a second display unit 200 and a holder 200 ′ for attaching/detaching the second display unit 200 to/from the ultrasonic device 1000 .

根据示例性实施例,第一显示单元100可以直接连接到超声波设备1000的本体,并且可以在执行超声波诊断期间显示超声波图像。图2B的第一显示单元100对应于图1的第一显示单元100,因此省略其详细描述。According to an exemplary embodiment, the first display unit 100 may be directly connected to the body of the ultrasound apparatus 1000, and may display an ultrasound image during performing ultrasound diagnosis. The first display unit 100 of FIG. 2B corresponds to the first display unit 100 of FIG. 1 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

第二显示单元200可以经由保持器200'附接到超声波设备1000,或者可以从超声波设备1000拆下。根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以包括用于感测第二显示单元200是否附接到超声波设备1000或从超声波设备1000拆下的传感器。例如,用于感测第二显示单元200是否附接到超声波设备1000或从超声波设备1000拆下的传感器或接口可以形成在保持器200'的内部或外部。The second display unit 200 may be attached to the ultrasonic device 1000 via the holder 200 ′, or may be detached from the ultrasonic device 1000 . According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may include a sensor for sensing whether the second display unit 200 is attached to or detached from the ultrasonic device 1000 . For example, a sensor or an interface for sensing whether the second display unit 200 is attached to or detached from the ultrasonic device 1000 may be formed inside or outside the holder 200'.

根据示例性实施例,如果第二显示单元200从超声波设备1000拆下,则第二显示单元200可以经由短距离通信与超声波设备1000通信。这里,短距离通信可以包括从无线保真(Wi-Fi),蓝牙,ZigBee,Wi-Fi直接(WFD),超宽带(UWB),红外数据关联(IrDA),蓝牙低能量(BLE)和近场通信(NFC)选择的至少一个,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the second display unit 200 is detached from the ultrasonic device 1000, the second display unit 200 may communicate with the ultrasonic device 1000 via short distance communication. Here, short-range communication can include wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), Bluetooth, ZigBee, Wi-Fi Direct (WFD), Ultra Wideband (UWB), Infrared Data Association (IrDA), Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) and near At least one of field communication (NFC) options, but not limited thereto.

例如,第二显示单元200感测触摸第二显示单元200的指示物400(例如,手指)的位置,并且将关于指示物400的位置的信息发送到超声波设备1000的通信器。这里,超声波设备1000可以从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个控制项目中选择与指示物400的位置相对应的至少一个控制项目。否则,第二显示单元200可以将与指示物400的位置相对应的控制项目的信息发送到超声波设备1000的通信器。For example, the second display unit 200 senses the position of the pointer 400 (eg, finger) touching the second display unit 200 and transmits information on the position of the pointer 400 to the communicator of the ultrasonic device 1000 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select at least one control item corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 from among a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 . Otherwise, the second display unit 200 may transmit the information of the control item corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 to the communicator of the ultrasonic device 1000 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以基于指示物400接触第二显示单元200的位置来在第一显示单元上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的一些或全部控制项目。在这种情况下,用户可以通过第一显示单元100来识别与第二显示单元200上的指示物400(例如,手指)的位置相对应的至少一个控制项目,而不直接看从超声波设备1000拆下的第二显示单元200。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display some or all of the control items displayed on the second display unit 200 on the first display unit based on a position where the pointer 400 contacts the second display unit 200 . In this case, the user can recognize at least one control item corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 (for example, a finger) on the second display unit 200 through the first display unit 100 without directly looking at the ultrasonic device 1000. The second display unit 200 is removed.

用户可以在看到第一显示单元100而不是从超声波设备1000拆下的第二显示单元200的同时,从显示在第二显示单元200上的控制项目中选择特定项目。在这种情况下,由于用户的注视可以固定在显示超声波图像的第一显示单元100上,所以用户可以集中在超声波图像上。A user may select a specific item from control items displayed on the second display unit 200 while looking at the first display unit 100 instead of the second display unit 200 detached from the ultrasound apparatus 1000 . In this case, since the user's gaze can be fixed on the first display unit 100 displaying the ultrasonic image, the user can concentrate on the ultrasonic image.

图3是示出根据实施例的便携式超声波设备1000的图。FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a portable ultrasonic device 1000 according to an embodiment.

如图3所示,根据本示例性实施例的超声波设备1000可以是便携式的。这里,超声波设备1000可以包括触摸屏型的第二显示单元200和探头20。超声波设备1000还可以包括用于与外部的第一显示单元100通信的通信器。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000的通信器可以经由短距离通信直接向第一显示单元100发送信息。As shown in FIG. 3 , the ultrasonic device 1000 according to the present exemplary embodiment may be portable. Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may include a touch screen type second display unit 200 and the probe 20 . The ultrasonic device 1000 may further include a communicator for communicating with the external first display unit 100 . In this case, the communicator of the ultrasonic device 1000 may directly transmit information to the first display unit 100 via short-distance communication.

此外,超声波设备1000可以经由服务器向第一显示单元100发送信息。例如,超声波设备1000的通信器可以经由图片归档和通信系统(PACS)与连接到超声波设备1000的第一显示单元200交换数据。超声波设备1000的通信器可以根据医学上的数字成像和通信(DICOM)进行数据通信。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may transmit information to the first display unit 100 via a server. For example, the communicator of the ultrasound device 1000 may exchange data with the first display unit 200 connected to the ultrasound device 1000 via a picture archiving and communication system (PACS). The communicator of the ultrasonic device 1000 can perform data communication according to Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM).

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将经由探头20获得的超声波图像显示在第二显示单元200上。此外,超声波设备1000可以将经由探头20获得的超声波图像发送到第一显示单元100。这里,第一显示单元100可以实时地显示对象10的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image obtained via the probe 20 on the second display unit 200 . Also, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may transmit an ultrasound image obtained via the probe 20 to the first display unit 100 . Here, the first display unit 100 may display the ultrasound image of the subject 10 in real time.

此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将基于触摸第二显示单元200的指示物400的位置来选择的至少一个控制项目的信息发送到第一显示单元100。这里,第一显示单元100可以与对象10的超声波图像一起显示关于至少一个控制项目的信息。在这种情况下,用户可以选择在第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目(例如,功能键),同时将眼睛固定在外部的显示超声波图像的第一显示单元100。Also, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may transmit information of at least one control item selected based on a position of the pointer 400 touching the second display unit 200 to the first display unit 100 . Here, the first display unit 100 may display information on at least one control item together with the ultrasound image of the subject 10 . In this case, the user may select at least one control item (eg, a function key) displayed on the second display unit 200 while fixing eyes on the external first display unit 100 displaying an ultrasonic image.

例如,用户可以在不移动他/她的眼睛的情况下执行超声波图像扫描操作,同时将他/她的眼睛保持在主屏幕(即,第一显示单元100)上,用他/她的右手保持探头20,并且用他/她的左手保持显示控制项目的触摸屏(即,第二显示单元200)。在下文中,将参考图4详细描述超声波设备1000在扫描超声波图像期间提供信息以便不分散用户的眼睛(例如超声检查者的眼睛)的方法。For example, the user can perform an ultrasound image scanning operation without moving his/her eyes while keeping his/her eyes on the main screen (ie, the first display unit 100 ), keeping his/her right hand probe 20, and hold the touch screen (ie, the second display unit 200) displaying control items with his/her left hand. Hereinafter, a method by which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 provides information so as not to distract a user's eyes (eg, a sonographer's eyes) during scanning of an ultrasound image will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 .

图4是示出根据示例性实施例的提供超声波设备的信息的方法的流程图。FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a method of providing information of an ultrasonic device according to an exemplary embodiment.

在操作S410中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 in operation S410.

显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像可以被不同地显示。例如,超声波图像可以是将由对象反射的超声波回波信号的大小作表示为亮度的亮度模式(B模式)图像,通过使用多普勒效应将移动对象的速度表示为颜色的颜色模式(C模式)图像,通过使用多普勒效应将移动对象的对象表示为频谱的多普勒模式(D模式)图像,表示在恒定位置处的对象关于时间的移动的运动模式(M模式)图像和将当施加压缩和不施加压缩到对象的反应之间的差异表示为图像的弹性模式图像中的至少一种;然而,本发明不限于此。根据示例性实施例,超声波图像可以是二维(2D)图像,三维(3D)图像或四维(4D)图像。The ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 may be variously displayed. For example, an ultrasonic image may be a brightness mode (B mode) image expressing the magnitude of an ultrasonic echo signal reflected by an object as brightness, and a color mode (C mode) expressing the speed of a moving object as color by using the Doppler effect image, a Doppler-mode (D-mode) image representing the object of a moving object as a spectrum by using the Doppler effect, a motion-mode (M-mode) image representing the movement of an object at a constant position with respect to time and will be applied when The difference between the responses of the subject with and without compression is represented as at least one of the elastic mode images of the images; however, the invention is not limited thereto. According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound image may be a two-dimensional (2D) image, a three-dimensional (3D) image or a four-dimensional (4D) image.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以基于从对象10获取的超声波图像数据实时地在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像。例如,超声波设备1000可以经由探头20向对象10发送超声波信号(波束),并且可以基于从对象10反射的超声波回波信号生成超声波图像。此外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示生成的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 in real time based on ultrasound image data acquired from the subject 10 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may transmit an ultrasonic signal (beam) to the subject 10 via the probe 20 and may generate an ultrasonic image based on ultrasonic echo signals reflected from the subject 10 . Also, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the generated ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示预先存储在存储介质中的超声波图像。例如,超声波设备1000可以从存储介质读取特定超声波图像,并且可以将读取的超声波图像显示在第一显示单元100上。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display ultrasound images pre-stored in a storage medium on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound device 1000 may read a specific ultrasound image from a storage medium, and may display the read ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 .

这里,存储介质可以是存在于超声波设备1000中的存储器,或存在于超声波设备1000的外部的外部存储设备(例如通用串行总线(USB),可穿戴装置和云服务器)。除此之外,存储介质可以是高速缓冲存储器。Here, the storage medium may be a memory existing in the ultrasonic device 1000, or an external storage device (such as a Universal Serial Bus (USB), a wearable device, and a cloud server) existing outside the ultrasonic device 1000 . Besides, the storage medium may be a cache memory.

在操作S420中,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示至少一个控制项目。所述至少一个控制项目可以是用户可选项目。例如,控制项目可以包括菜单,调整按钮,模式选择按钮,快捷图标,用于调整参数值的调整界面,功能键,设置窗口等,但不限于此。In operation S420, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item on the second display unit 200 . The at least one control item may be a user selectable item. For example, the control items may include menus, adjustment buttons, mode selection buttons, shortcut icons, adjustment interfaces for adjusting parameter values, function keys, setting windows, etc., but are not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,显示在第二显示单元200上的至少一个控制项目可以与超声波图像相关。例如,至少一个控制项目可以是用于调整与超声波图像数据(或超声回波信号)有关的参数值的项目,并且可以包括时间增益补偿(TGC)/横向增益补偿(LGC)设置窗口,2D/3D/4D按钮,增益按钮,聚焦按钮,深度按钮,变焦按钮,动态范围按钮,灰度图按钮,色度映射按钮,低MI按钮,拒绝级别按钮等。According to an exemplary embodiment, at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 may be related to an ultrasound image. For example, at least one control item may be an item for adjusting a parameter value related to ultrasonic image data (or ultrasonic echo signal), and may include a time gain compensation (TGC)/lateral gain compensation (LGC) setting window, 2D/ 3D/4D button, gain button, focus button, depth button, zoom button, dynamic range button, grayscale button, chroma map button, low MI button, rejection level button, etc.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200的整个区域上显示控制项目。除此之外,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200的部分区域上显示控制项目。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200的第一区域上显示对象10的超声波图像,并且可以在第二显示单元200的第二区域上显示与超声波图像相关的控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display control items on the entire area of the second display unit 200 . Besides, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display control items on a partial area of the second display unit 200 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image of the subject 10 on a first area of the second display unit 200 , and may display control items related to the ultrasound image on a second area of the second display unit 200 .

在操作S430中,超声波设备1000可以感测指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置。这里,指示物400可以是用户的手指或诸如电子笔的外部装置。In operation S430, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 . Here, the pointer 400 may be a user's finger or an external device such as an electronic pen.

此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以感测指示物400的与第二显示单元200接触的位置,或者可以感测指示物400在距离第二显示单元200的预定距离内悬停的位置,而不接触第二显示单元200。Also, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a position where the pointer 400 is in contact with the second display unit 200 , or may sense a position where the pointer 400 hovers within a predetermined distance from the second display unit 200 , without touching the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以以各种方式感测指示物400的位置。例如,超声波设备1000可以通过使用内部传感器(例如,检测电容变化的传感器,压力传感器,红外线传感器,温度传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器等)来感测指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置。可替代地,超声波设备1000可以通过使用诸如相机(例如,一般相机,红外线相机,深度相机,闭路电视(CCTV)等)的外部设备来感测指示物400在第二显示单元上的位置。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 in various ways. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 by using an internal sensor (eg, a sensor for detecting a change in capacitance, a pressure sensor, an infrared sensor, a temperature sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, etc.) . Alternatively, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit by using an external device such as a camera (eg, a general camera, an infrared camera, a depth camera, a closed circuit television (CCTV), etc.).

以下将参照图5至8更详细地说明超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法。The method for the ultrasonic device 1000 to sense the position of the indicator 400 will be described in more detail below with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 .

在操作S440中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上与超声波图像一起显示在第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符。In operation S440, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator indicating the location of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 together with the ultrasound image.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符,以与超声波图像重叠。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator indicating a position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 to overlap the ultrasound image. For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator on the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符,以不与超声波图像重叠。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域上显示至少一个菜单项目和指示符。这里,第一区域和第二区域可以彼此不同。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator indicating a position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 so as not to overlap with an ultrasound image. For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on a first area of the first display unit 100 and may display at least one menu item and an indicator on a second area of the first display unit 100 . Here, the first area and the second area may be different from each other.

根据示例性实施例,指示指示物400的位置的指示符可以被实现为预定义形状,预定义线,预定义颜色或预定义阴影,但不限于此。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上将指示指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置的指示符表示为箭头或圆。除此之外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上以红色或黄色表示将指示指示物400的位置的指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 may be implemented as a predefined shape, a predefined line, a predefined color, or a predefined shade, but is not limited thereto. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may represent an indicator indicating a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100 as an arrow or a circle. Besides, the ultrasonic device 1000 may represent an indicator that will indicate the position of the pointer 400 in red or yellow on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以表示指示器400,其指示指示物400在显示在第一显示单元100上的至少一个控制项目上的位置。例如,超声波设备1000可以从显示在第二显示单元200上的至少一个控制项目中选择与指示物400的位置相对应的第一控制项目。超声波设备1000可以将指示器定位在从显示在第一显示单元100上的至少一个控制项目中的第一控制项目上。例如,超声波设备1000可以将围绕第一控制项目的轮廓线标记为指示符。除此之外,超声波设备1000可以以特定颜色(例如,红色)表示第一控制项目,或者将指示符表示为第一控制项目上的阴影。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may represent a pointer 400 indicating a position of the pointer 400 on at least one control item displayed on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select a first control item corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 from at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 . The ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may position a pointer on a first control item among at least one control item displayed on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark a contour line surrounding the first control item as an indicator. Besides, the ultrasonic device 1000 may represent the first control item in a specific color (for example, red), or represent the indicator as a shade on the first control item.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以考虑第一显示单元100的尺寸来显示至少一个控制项目。例如,如果第一显示单元100是第二显示单元200的两倍大,则超声波设备1000可以将显示在第二显示单元200上的控制项目增加两倍以显示在第一显示单元100上。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item in consideration of the size of the first display unit 100 . For example, if the first display unit 100 is twice as large as the second display unit 200 , the ultrasound device 1000 may triple control items displayed on the second display unit 200 to be displayed on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可基于显示控制项目的区域相对于第二显示单元200的整个区域的比率来在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目。例如,如果至少一个控制项目显示在第二显示单元200的整个区域的一半上,则超声波设备1000可以在对应于第一显示单元100的整个区域的1/2的区域上显示至少一个控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item on the first display unit 100 based on a ratio of an area where the control item is displayed with respect to an entire area of the second display unit 200 . For example, if at least one control item is displayed on half of the entire area of the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item on an area corresponding to 1/2 of the entire area of the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以基于控制项目在第二显示单元200上显示的位置来确定控制项目在第一显示单元100上显示的位置。例如,如果控制项目显示在第二显示单元200的左上部分上,则超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的左上部分显示控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine the position where the control item is displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the position where the control item is displayed on the second display unit 200 . For example, if the control item is displayed on the upper left portion of the second display unit 200 , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the control item on the upper left portion of the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以根据控制项目在第二显示单元200上显示的布局来在第一显示单元100上显示控制项目。可替代地,超声波设备1000可以以与控制项目在第二显示单元200上的布局不同的布局来在第一显示单元100上显示控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the control items on the first display unit 100 according to the layout in which the control items are displayed on the second display unit 200 . Alternatively, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the control items on the first display unit 100 in a layout different from the layout of the control items on the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400触摸第二显示单元100的位置的变化来改变指示物在第一显示单元上显示的位置。例如,如果触摸第二显示单元200的指示物400移动到左侧,则在第一显示单元100上显示的指示物也可以移动到左侧。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may change a position where the pointer 400 is displayed on the first display unit according to a change in a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 100 . For example, if the pointer 400 touching the second display unit 200 moves to the left, the pointer displayed on the first display unit 100 may also move to the left.

此外,超声波设备1000可以在正常操作期间在第一显示单元100上仅显示超声波图像,并且当发生特定事件时可以另外地在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置的指示符。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display only an ultrasonic image on the first display unit 100 during normal operation, and may additionally display at least one of the images displayed on the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100 when a specific event occurs. A control item and an indicator indicating a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 .

在下文中,将参照图5至8描述在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目的时间点。Hereinafter, a time point at which at least one control item is displayed on the first display unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 .

图5是示出当触摸屏的触摸事件发生时超声波设备1000用于在主屏幕上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符的操作的图。在图5中,示出了第一显示单元100是主屏幕,第二显示单元200是触摸屏,并且指示物400是手指500的示例。FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an operation of the ultrasonic device 1000 for displaying at least one control item and an indicator on a home screen when a touch event of the touch screen occurs. In FIG. 5 , an example in which the first display unit 100 is a home screen, the second display unit 200 is a touch screen, and the pointer 400 is a finger 500 is shown.

在操作S500和S510中,超声波设备1000可以经由包括在第二显示单元200中的触摸传感器感测手指500的触摸。例如,包括在第二显示单元200中的触摸传感器(例如,检测电容变化的传感器和压力传感器)可以识别手指500触摸的第二显示单元200的位置。在这种情况下,第二显示单元200可以通知超声波设备1000的控制器发生触摸事件。除此之外,第二显示单元200可以向控制器发送关于触摸位置的信息(例如,坐标信息和关于在触摸位置上显示的控制项目的信息)。In operations S500 and S510 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the touch of the finger 500 via the touch sensor included in the second display unit 200 . For example, a touch sensor (eg, a sensor detecting a capacitance change and a pressure sensor) included in the second display unit 200 may recognize a position of the second display unit 200 touched by the finger 500 . In this case, the second display unit 200 may notify the controller of the ultrasonic device 1000 that the touch event occurs. Besides, the second display unit 200 may transmit information on the touched position (for example, coordinate information and information on control items displayed on the touched position) to the controller.

在操作S520中,当触摸事件发生时,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符。例如,超声波设备1000可以显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目502,以及表示手指500在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像501上的位置的指示符503。这里,由于手指500位于第二显示单元200中的第三行和第二列的菜单上,所以可以在第一显示单元100中的第三行和第二列的菜单上表示红色圆作为表示手指500的位置的指示符503。In operation S520, when a touch event occurs, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of menu items 502 displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator 503 representing a position of the finger 500 on the ultrasound image 501 displayed on the first display unit 100 . Here, since the finger 500 is located on the menu in the third row and the second column in the second display unit 200, a red circle may be indicated on the menu in the third row and the second column in the first display unit 100 as a finger. An indicator 503 of the location of 500 .

在第一显示单元100上显示的多个菜单项目502和指示符503可以是半透明的。此外,如果用户在第二显示单元200上移动他/她的手指500(例如,拖动手势),则超声波设备1000也可以移动指示符503的位置。The plurality of menu items 502 and indicators 503 displayed on the first display unit 100 may be translucent. Also, if the user moves his/her finger 500 on the second display unit 200 (for example, a drag gesture), the ultrasonic device 1000 may also move the position of the indicator 503 .

此外,当触摸事件在从多个菜单项目502中的第一项目上结束时(例如,用户从第二显示单元200上显示的第一项目移除他/她的手指500),超声波设备1000可以执行关于第一项目的功能。除此之外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100和/或第二显示单元200上显示与第一项目相关的GUI。In addition, when the touch event ends on the first item from among the plurality of menu items 502 (for example, the user removes his/her finger 500 from the first item displayed on the second display unit 200), the ultrasonic device 1000 may Execute the function on the first item. Besides, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a GUI related to the first item on the first display unit 100 and/or the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,如果触摸事件在不显示多个菜单项目502的空白部分上结束,则已经在第一显示单元100上显示的多个菜单项目502和指示符503被移除,从而第一显示单元100可以仅显示超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the touch event ends on a blank portion where the plurality of menu items 502 are not displayed, the plurality of menu items 502 and the indicator 503 that have been displayed on the first display unit 100 are removed, so that the first The display unit 100 may display only ultrasound images.

因此,当用户触摸第二显示单元200时,用户可以通过第一显示单元100来识别和操纵第二显示单元200上的多个菜单项目502与对象的超声波图像501,而不将他/她的头部转动到第二显示单元200。Therefore, when the user touches the second display unit 200, the user can recognize and manipulate the plurality of menu items 502 on the second display unit 200 and the ultrasonic image 501 of the subject through the first display unit 100 without moving his/her The head turns to the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以感测用户正在经由探头20或包括在探头20中的传感器来扫描对象10的超声波图像。此外,当用户正在扫描对象10的超声波图像时感测到第二显示单元200上的触摸时,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目502或一些菜单项目502以及超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may sense that a user is scanning an ultrasonic image of the subject 10 via the probe 20 or a sensor included in the probe 20 . In addition, when a touch on the second display unit 200 is sensed while the user is scanning the ultrasonic image of the subject 10, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a plurality of menu items displayed on the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100. 502 or some menu items 502 and an ultrasound image.

图6是示出根据预定义的手势,超声波设备1000在主屏幕上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符的操作。在图6中,示出了第一显示单元100是主屏幕,第二显示单元200是触摸屏,并且指示物400是手指600的示例。FIG. 6 illustrates an operation of the ultrasonic device 1000 displaying at least one control item and an indicator on a home screen according to a predefined gesture. In FIG. 6 , an example in which the first display unit 100 is a home screen, the second display unit 200 is a touch screen, and the pointer 400 is a finger 600 is shown.

在操作S610中,超声波设备1000可以感测在第二显示单元200上的预定义手势。预定义手势可以是用于在第一显示单元100上引导已经显示的至少一个控制项目在第二显示单元200上显示的手势。例如,超声波设备1000可以从用户接收滑动手势601,即,在第二显示单元200上向上滑动手指600。In operation S610, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a predefined gesture on the second display unit 200 . The predefined gesture may be a gesture for guiding at least one control item already displayed on the first display unit 100 to be displayed on the second display unit 200 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a slide gesture 601 from a user, that is, slide a finger 600 upward on the second display unit 200 .

在操作S620中,超声波设备1000可以在接收到预定义手势时,在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符。例如,在第二显示单元200上接收到滑动手势601时,超声波设备1000可以在当前显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像602上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目603和指示手指600的位置的指示符604。In operation S620, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator on the first display unit 100 when a predefined gesture is received. For example, when a slide gesture 601 is received on the second display unit 200, the ultrasound device 1000 may display a plurality of menu items 603 displayed on the second display unit 200 on the ultrasound image 602 currently displayed on the first display unit 100 and an indicator 604 indicating the position of the finger 600 .

此外,在第一显示单元100上显示的多个菜单项目603和指示符604可以是半透明的。此外,当用户在显示在第二显示单元200上的多个菜单项目603上移动他/她的手指600(例如,拖动手势)时,超声波设备1000可以根据手指600的触摸位置来移动指示符604。Also, the plurality of menu items 603 and indicators 604 displayed on the first display unit 100 may be translucent. Also, when the user moves his/her finger 600 (for example, a drag gesture) on a plurality of menu items 603 displayed on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 can move the indicator according to the touch position of the finger 600. 604.

根据示例性实施例,用户可以选择多个菜单项目603中的一个。例如,当指示符604位于第一项目时,用户可以在多个菜单项目603上拖动他/她的手指600,然后可以双击第二显示单元200。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以感测第一项目上的双击手势,并且可以执行与第一项目相对应的功能。According to an exemplary embodiment, a user may select one of a plurality of menu items 603 . For example, when the pointer 604 is located at the first item, the user may drag his/her finger 600 on the plurality of menu items 603 and then may double-tap the second display unit 200 . In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a double tap gesture on the first item, and may execute a function corresponding to the first item.

除此之外,当指示符604位于第一项目时,用户可以将他/她的手指600拖动到多个菜单项目603上,并且可以将他/她的中指放置在第二显示单元200上。这里,超声波设备1000可以感测第一项目上的多手指手势,并且可以执行与第一项目相对应的功能。Besides, when the pointer 604 is located at the first item, the user can drag his/her finger 600 onto a plurality of menu items 603, and can place his/her middle finger on the second display unit 200 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a multi-finger gesture on the first item, and may perform a function corresponding to the first item.

在图6中,虽然滑动手势设置为预定义手势的示例,但是预定义手势不限于滑动手势。例如,预定义手势可以包括触摸和保持特定位置的手势,选择特定硬件按钮的手势,多手指手势(例如,在触摸屏上将五个手指聚集在一起)等,但不限于此。In FIG. 6, although the slide gesture is set as an example of the predefined gesture, the predefined gesture is not limited to the slide gesture. For example, the predefined gestures may include gestures of touching and holding a specific location, gestures of selecting a specific hardware button, multi-finger gestures (for example, gathering five fingers together on a touch screen), etc., but are not limited thereto.

图7是示出超声波设备1000的用于通过使用压力传感器感测触摸触摸屏的压力的操作的图。在图7中,示出了第一显示单元100是显示超声波图像的主屏幕,第二显示单元200是显示菜单项目的屏幕,并且指示物400是手指700的示例。FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an operation of the ultrasonic device 1000 for sensing a pressure touching a touch screen by using a pressure sensor. In FIG. 7 , an example is shown in which the first display unit 100 is a main screen displaying ultrasound images, the second display unit 200 is a screen displaying menu items, and the pointer 400 is a finger 700 .

在操作S700中,超声波设备1000可以感测在第二显示单元200上的触摸和保持手势。这里,超声波设备1000可以通过使用包括在第二显示单元200中的压力传感器来测量手指700触摸第二显示单元200的压力。In operation S700 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a touch and hold gesture on the second display unit 200 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may measure the pressure with which the finger 700 touches the second display unit 200 by using a pressure sensor included in the second display unit 200 .

在操作S710中,超声波设备1000可以确定由包括在第二显示单元200中的压力传感器测量的值是否大于临界值。例如,超声波设备1000可以确定手指700是否以等于或大于临界值的压力推动第二显示单元200。In operation S710, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may determine whether a value measured by the pressure sensor included in the second display unit 200 is greater than a critical value. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine whether the finger 700 pushes the second display unit 200 with a pressure equal to or greater than a threshold value.

在操作S720中,当由包括在第二显示单元200中的压力传感器测量的值大于临界值时,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符。例如,超声波设备1000可以在当前显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像701上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目702,以及指示手指700的位置的指示符703。In operation S720, when the value measured by the pressure sensor included in the second display unit 200 is greater than a critical value, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound device 1000 may display a plurality of menu items 702 displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator 703 indicating the position of the finger 700 on the ultrasound image 701 currently displayed on the first display unit 100 .

这里,当用户在显示在第二显示单元200上的多个菜单项目702上移动他/她的手指700(例如,拖动手势)时,超声波设备1000可以根据手指700的位置来移动指示符703。Here, when the user moves his/her finger 700 (for example, a drag gesture) on a plurality of menu items 702 displayed on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 703 according to the position of the finger 700 .

根据示例性实施例,用户可以选择多个菜单项目702中的一个。例如,当指示符703位于第一项目时,用户可以在多个菜单项目702上拖动他/她的手指700,并且双击第二显示单元200。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以感测第一项目上的双击手势,并且可以执行与第一项目相对应的功能。According to an exemplary embodiment, a user may select one of a plurality of menu items 702 . For example, when the pointer 703 is located at the first item, the user may drag his/her finger 700 on the plurality of menu items 702 and double-tap the second display unit 200 . In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a double tap gesture on the first item, and may execute a function corresponding to the first item.

图8是示出超声波设备1000的用于通过使用相机感测用户的接近触摸手势的操作的图。FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating an operation of the ultrasonic device 1000 for sensing a user's proximity touch gesture by using a camera.

在操作S810中,超声波设备1000可以经由相机感测位于第二显示单元200上方的指示物400。例如,超声波设备1000可以经由相机感测用户的悬停手势800。In operation S810, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the pointer 400 located above the second display unit 200 via the camera. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a user's hovering gesture 800 via a camera.

在本说明书中,悬停手势可以表示输入事件,其中指示物400(例如,手指或电子笔)在预定距离内接近第二显示单元200。例如,悬停手势可以表示指示物400接近第二显示单元200到超声波设备1000可以检测指示物400(例如,手指)的位置的距离的事件。In this specification, a hover gesture may represent an input event in which a pointer 400 (eg, a finger or an electronic pen) approaches the second display unit 200 within a predetermined distance. For example, a hovering gesture may represent an event that the pointer 400 approaches the second display unit 200 to a distance from a position where the ultrasonic device 1000 can detect the pointer 400 (eg, a finger).

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由多个相机或经由一个相机感测第二显示单元200上方的指示物400。此外,超声波设备1000可以经由附接在其中的相机或位于超声波设备1000外部的相机来感测第二显示单元200上方的指示物400。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the pointer 400 above the second display unit 200 via a plurality of cameras or via one camera. Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the pointer 400 above the second display unit 200 via a camera attached therein or a camera located outside the ultrasonic device 1000 .

这里,相机可以包括一般相机810(例如,图像传感器),红外线相机820(例如,红外线传感器),深度相机(例如,深度传感器)和CCTV,但不限于此。Here, the camera may include a general camera 810 (eg, an image sensor), an infrared camera 820 (eg, an infrared sensor), a depth camera (eg, a depth sensor), and CCTV, but is not limited thereto.

例如,超声波设备1000可以通过分析经由一般相机810获得的图像数据(多个图像帧)来感测位于第二显示单元200上方的指示物400。除此之外,超声波设备1000可以通过分析由红外线相机820获得的红外图像数据来感测位于第二显示单元200上方的指示物400。具体地,如果指示物400是手指,则由于第二显示单元200和手指的温度之间存在较大差异,因此超声波设备1000可以经由红外线相机820容易地识别第二显示单元200上方的手指。For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the pointer 400 located above the second display unit 200 by analyzing image data (a plurality of image frames) obtained through the general camera 810 . Besides, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the pointer 400 located above the second display unit 200 by analyzing infrared image data obtained by the infrared camera 820 . Specifically, if the pointer 400 is a finger, the ultrasonic device 1000 can easily recognize the finger above the second display unit 200 via the infrared camera 820 because there is a large difference between the temperatures of the second display unit 200 and the finger.

此外,超声波设备1000可以基于从深度相机到第二显示单元200的第一深度值和从深度相机到手指的第二深度值之间的差异来感测位于第二显示单元200上方的手指。Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a finger located above the second display unit 200 based on a difference between a first depth value from the depth camera to the second display unit 200 and a second depth value from the depth camera to the finger.

在操作S820中,如果通过相机感测位于第二显示单元200上方的指示物400,则超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符。例如,超声波设备1000可以在当前显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像801上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目802以及指示手指的位置的指示符803。In operation S820, if the pointer 400 located above the second display unit 200 is sensed through the camera, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of menu items 802 displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator 803 indicating a position of a finger on an ultrasound image 801 currently displayed on the first display unit 100 .

这里,如果用户在不接触第二显示单元200的情况下(例如,悬停手势)在与第二显示单元200的预定间隔距离内移动他/她的手指,则超声波设备1000可以根据手指的位置来移动指示符803。Here, if the user moves his/her finger within a predetermined separation distance from the second display unit 200 without touching the second display unit 200 (for example, a hovering gesture), the ultrasonic device 1000 may to move indicator 803 .

根据示例性实施例,用户可以选择多个菜单项目802中的一个。例如,用户可以在与第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目802的预定间隔距离内悬停他/她的手指,然后可以触摸第二显示单元200(或当指示符803位于第一项目时触摸第二显示单元200上的第一项目)。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000通过使用相机或触摸传感器来感测用户对第一项目的触摸手势,并且执行与第一项目相对应的功能。According to an exemplary embodiment, a user may select one of a plurality of menu items 802 . For example, the user can hover his/her finger within a predetermined interval distance from a plurality of menu items 802 displayed on the second display unit 200, and then can touch the second display unit 200 (or when the pointer 803 is located on the first item while touching the first item on the second display unit 200). In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 senses a user's touch gesture on the first item by using a camera or a touch sensor, and performs a function corresponding to the first item.

超声波图像801上的多个菜单项目802可以被显示为半透明的。参考图9,下面将描述超声波设备1000的用于基于预定义的透明度信息在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目的操作。A plurality of menu items 802 on the ultrasound image 801 may be displayed semi-transparently. Referring to FIG. 9 , an operation of the ultrasonic device 1000 for displaying at least one control item on the first display unit 100 based on predefined transparency information will be described below.

图9是示出超声波设备1000确定至少一个控制项目的透明度的方法的流程图。FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a method for the ultrasonic device 1000 to determine transparency of at least one control item.

在操作S910中,超声波设备1000可以获取预定义的透明度信息。透明度信息可以是用于定义显示在第二显示单元200上的至少一个控制项目的透明度的信息。这里,透明度可以由用户或超声波设备1000定义。此外,可以根据用户输入来改变预定义的透明度信息。In operation S910, the ultrasonic device 1000 may acquire predefined transparency information. The transparency information may be information for defining transparency of at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 . Here, the transparency may be defined by the user or the ultrasonic device 1000 . Furthermore, predefined transparency information may be changed according to user input.

根据示例性实施例,预定义的透明度信息可以包括被定义为相对于控制项目不同的透明度。例如,第一项目到第十项目可以具有20%的透明度,第十一项目到第十五项目可以具有30%的透明度,并且第十六项目到第二十二项目可以具有35%的透明度。According to an exemplary embodiment, the predefined transparency information may include transparency defined to be different with respect to the control item. For example, the first to tenth items may have a transparency of 20%, the eleventh to fifteenth items may have a 30% transparency, and the sixteenth to twenty-second items may have a 35% transparency.

根据示例性实施例,可以从超声波设备1000的存储器读取预定义的透明度信息,或者可以从外部发送。According to an exemplary embodiment, predefined transparency information may be read from a memory of the ultrasonic device 1000, or may be transmitted from the outside.

在操作S920中,超声波设备1000可以根据预定义的透明度信息确定至少一个控制项目的透明度。例如,超声波设备1000可以基于预定义的透明度信息来确定相对于显示在第二显示单元200上的全部控制项目或者相对于显示在第二显示单元200上的一些控制项目的透明度。In operation S920, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine transparency of at least one control item according to predefined transparency information. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine transparency with respect to all control items displayed on the second display unit 200 or with respect to some control items displayed on the second display unit 200 based on predefined transparency information.

根据示例性实施例,预定义的透明度信息可以包括关于指示指示物400的位置的指示符的透明度的信息。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以根据预定义的透明度信息来确定指示符的透明度。According to an exemplary embodiment, the predefined transparency information may include information on transparency of an indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 . In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the transparency of the indicator according to predefined transparency information.

在操作S930中,根据确定的透明度,超声波设备1000可以显示至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400在超声波图像上的位置的指示符。例如,如果所确定的透明率为30%,则超声波设备1000可以以30%的透明度在超声波图像上显示该至少一个控制项目。In operation S930, according to the determined transparency, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator indicating a position of the pointer 400 on the ultrasound image. For example, if the determined transparency rate is 30%, the ultrasound device 1000 may display the at least one control item on the ultrasound image with a transparency of 30%.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以显示具有彼此不同的透明度的指示指示物400的位置的指示符和至少一个控制项目。例如,超声波设备1000可以将指示符显示为不透明,并且可以在第一显示单元100上显示具有30%的透明度的至少一个控制项目。可替代地,超声波设备1000可以以20%的透明度显示指示符,并且在第一显示单元100上以50%的透明度显示至少一个控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an indicator indicating a position of the pointer 400 and at least one control item having transparency different from each other. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the indicator as opaque, and may display at least one control item having a transparency of 30% on the first display unit 100 . Alternatively, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the indicator with a transparency of 20%, and display at least one control item with a transparency of 50% on the first display unit 100 .

此外,根据示例性实施例,预定义的透明度信息还可以包括颜色信息。因此,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以确定控制项目的颜色或指示符的颜色。此外,超声波设备1000可以以所确定的颜色在超声波图像上显示控制项目或指示符。Furthermore, according to an exemplary embodiment, the predefined transparency information may further include color information. Therefore, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the color of the control item or the color of the indicator. Also, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display control items or indicators on the ultrasound image in the determined color.

图10是示出超声波设备1000在主屏幕上将至少一个控制项目显示为透明的示例的图。在图10中,作为示例,假设第一显示单元100是主屏幕,第二显示单元200是触摸屏。FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays at least one control item as transparent on a home screen. In FIG. 10 , as an example, it is assumed that the first display unit 100 is a main screen and the second display unit 200 is a touch screen.

参考图10,第一显示单元100可以显示超声波图像1001,并且第二显示单元200可以显示多个控制项目1002。如果用户通过指示物400(例如,手指)触摸第二显示单元200,则超声波设备1000感测第二显示单元200上的触摸事件,并且可以在第一显示单元100的超声波图像1001上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个控制项目1002。此外,超声波设备1000可以显示指示指示物400在第一显示单元100上的位置的指示符1003以及多个控制项目1002。Referring to FIG. 10 , the first display unit 100 may display an ultrasound image 1001 , and the second display unit 200 may display a plurality of control items 1002 . If the user touches the second display unit 200 through a pointer 400 (for example, a finger), the ultrasonic device 1000 senses the touch event on the second display unit 200, and may display the second display on the ultrasonic image 1001 of the first display unit 100. Two control items 1002 displayed on the display unit 200 . In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an indicator 1003 indicating a position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 and a plurality of control items 1002 .

超声波设备1000可以调整多个控制项目1002的透明度,使得显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像1001可以不被多个控制项目1002阻挡。例如,超声波设备1000可以以30%的透明度显示多个控制项目1002和指示符1003。在这种情况下,用户可以在第一显示单元100上同时看到超声波图像1001,多个控制项目1002和指示符1003。The ultrasonic device 1000 can adjust the transparency of the plurality of control items 1002 so that the ultrasonic image 1001 displayed on the first display unit 100 may not be blocked by the plurality of control items 1002 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a plurality of control items 1002 and indicators 1003 with 30% transparency. In this case, the user can simultaneously see the ultrasound image 1001 , the plurality of control items 1002 and the indicator 1003 on the first display unit 100 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以从用户接收用于将在第一显示单元100上显示的多个控制项目1002的透明度从30%调整到20%的输入。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以以20%的透明度在超声波图像1001上显示多个控制项目1002。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input for adjusting the transparency of the plurality of control items 1002 displayed on the first display unit 100 from 30% to 20% from the user. In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items 1002 on the ultrasound image 1001 with 20% transparency.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以显示多个控制项目1002,以便不覆盖在超声图像1001上。下面将参照图11描述超声波设备1000的用于将多个控制项目1002显示为不覆盖在超声波图像1001上的操作。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items 1002 so as not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image 1001 . An operation of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 for displaying a plurality of control items 1002 not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image 1001 will be described below with reference to FIG. 11 .

图11是示出超声波设备1000在不显示超声波图像的区域上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符的方法的图。FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a method in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays at least one control item and an indicator on a region where an ultrasound image is not displayed.

在操作S1110中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像。In operation S1110 , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on a first region of the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以基于从对象10获取的超声波图像数据实时地在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像。此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示预先存储在存储介质中的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first region of the first display unit 100 in real time based on ultrasound image data acquired from the subject 10 . In addition, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an ultrasonic image pre-stored in a storage medium on the first region of the first display unit 100 .

这里,超声波图像可以是B模式图像,C模式图像,D模式图像,M模式图像和弹性模式图像中的至少一种,但不限于此。另外,根据示例性实施例,超声波图像可以是2D图像,3D图像或4D图像。Here, the ultrasonic image may be at least one of a B-mode image, a C-mode image, a D-mode image, an M-mode image, and an elastic-mode image, but is not limited thereto. Also, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic image may be a 2D image, a 3D image or a 4D image.

在操作S1120中,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像有关的至少一个控制项目。In operation S1120, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item related to the ultrasound image on the second display unit 200 .

所述至少一个控制项目可以是用户可选项目。例如,控制项目可以包括菜单,调整按钮,模式选择按钮,快捷图标,用于调整参数值的调整界面,功能键,设置窗口等,但不限于此。The at least one control item may be a user selectable item. For example, the control items may include menus, adjustment buttons, mode selection buttons, shortcut icons, adjustment interfaces for adjusting parameter values, function keys, setting windows, etc., but are not limited thereto.

操作S1120对应于图4的操作S420,因此省略其详细描述。Operation S1120 corresponds to operation S420 of FIG. 4 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

在操作S1130中,超声波设备1000可以感测指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置。这里,指示物400可以是用户的手指或诸如电子笔的外部装置。In operation S1130, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 . Here, the pointer 400 may be a user's finger or an external device such as an electronic pen.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以以各种方式感测指示物400的位置。例如,超声波设备1000可以通过使用内部传感器(例如,检测电容变化的传感器,压力传感器,红外线传感器,温度传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器等)来感测指示物400在第二显示单元上的位置。可替代地,超声波设备1000可以通过使用诸如相机(例如,一般相机,红外线相机,深度相机,CCTV相机等)的外部设备来感测指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 in various ways. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit by using an internal sensor (eg, a sensor detecting capacitance change, a pressure sensor, an infrared sensor, a temperature sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, etc.). Alternatively, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 by using an external device such as a camera (eg, a general camera, an infrared camera, a depth camera, a CCTV camera, etc.).

超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法在上面参照图5至8描述,因此省略其详细描述。The method of the ultrasonic device 1000 sensing the position of the pointer 400 is described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

在操作S1140中,超声波设备1000可以检测超声波图像在第一显示单元100中显示的第一区域。例如,超声波设备1000可以基于第一显示单元100的呈现信息来检测其上显示超声波图像的第一区域。In operation S1140 , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may detect a first region where the ultrasound image is displayed in the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may detect a first region on which an ultrasound image is displayed based on presentation information of the first display unit 100 .

在操作S1150中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的与第一区域不同的第二区域上显示至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符。In operation S1150, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator indicating a position of the pointer 400 on a second area of the first display unit 100 different from the first area.

在这种情况下,超声波图像不被至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符所隐藏。In this case, the ultrasonic image is not hidden by at least one control item and an indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 .

参考图12,下面将描述超声波设备1000将多个控制项目显示为不覆盖在超声波图像上的示例。Referring to FIG. 12 , an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays a plurality of control items not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image will be described below.

图12是示出超声波设备1000在主屏幕的第一区域1201上显示超声波图像并且在主屏幕的第二区域1202上显示至少一个控制项目和指示符的示例的图。在图12中,作为示例,假设第一显示单元100是主屏幕,第二显示单元200是触摸屏。FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays an ultrasound image on a first area 1201 of a home screen and displays at least one control item and an indicator on a second area 1202 of the home screen. In FIG. 12 , as an example, it is assumed that the first display unit 100 is a main screen and the second display unit 200 is a touch screen.

参考图12,超声波设备1000可以感测在第一显示单元100(即主屏幕)的第一区域1201上显示对象的超声波图像期间,指示物400(例如,手指)触摸第二显示单元200的触摸事件的发生。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个控制项目,以便不覆盖在超声波图像上。Referring to FIG. 12 , the ultrasound device 1000 can sense a touch of a pointer 400 (for example, a finger) touching the second display unit 200 during display of an ultrasound image of an object on a first area 1201 of the first display unit 100 (ie, a main screen). the occurrence of the event. In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100 so as not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image.

例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的与第一区域1201不同的第二区域1202上显示多个菜单项目。这里,显示在第二区域1202上的多个菜单项目可以布置成与在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目不同。也就是说,可以根据第二区域1202的尺寸来改变多个菜单项目的布置。For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a plurality of menu items on a second area 1202 of the first display unit 100 different from the first area 1201 . Here, the plurality of menu items displayed on the second region 1202 may be arranged differently from the plurality of menu items displayed on the second display unit 200 . That is, arrangement of a plurality of menu items may be changed according to the size of the second area 1202 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以减小显示在第一区域1201上的超声波图像的尺寸,以便在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个菜单项目。例如,如果超声波图像占据第一显示单元100的整个屏幕的90%或更大,则超声波设备1000可以将超声波图像的尺寸减小到2/3,以便显示多个菜单项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may reduce the size of the ultrasound image displayed on the first region 1201 to display a plurality of menu items displayed on the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the ultrasound image occupies 90% or more of the entire screen of the first display unit 100, the ultrasound device 1000 may reduce the size of the ultrasound image to 2/3 in order to display a plurality of menu items.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以改变超声波图像的位置,以便在第一显示单元100上显示第二显示单元200的多个菜单项目。例如,如果超声波图像显示在第一显示单元100的中心部分上,则超声波设备1000可以将超声波图像移动到左侧,以在第一显示单元100的右侧显示多个菜单项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the position of the ultrasound image in order to display a plurality of menu items of the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100 . For example, if an ultrasound image is displayed on the center portion of the first display unit 100 , the ultrasound device 1000 may move the ultrasound image to the left to display a plurality of menu items on the right side of the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示指示指示物400在第二显示单元200上的触摸位置的指示符。例如,如果用户触摸从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个菜单项目中的第一项目1203,则超声波设备1000可以从显示在第一显示单元100上的多个菜单项目中标记围绕第一项目1203的方形的指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an indicator indicating a touch position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the user touches the first item 1203 among the plurality of menu items displayed on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark the first item 1203 from the plurality of menu items displayed on the first display unit 100. Item 1203 is a square indicator.

图13是示出根据示例性实施例的超声波设备1000通过使用多个显示单元提供信息的方法的流程图。FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a method of the ultrasonic device 1000 providing information by using a plurality of display units according to an exemplary embodiment.

在操作S1310中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 in operation S1310.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将经由探头20获得的超声波图像实时地显示在第一显示单元100上。此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示预先存储在存储介质中的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display ultrasound images obtained via the probe 20 on the first display unit 100 in real time. In addition, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an ultrasonic image pre-stored in a storage medium on the first display unit 100 .

超声波图像可以包括B模式图像,C模式图像,D模式图像,M模式图像和弹性模式图像中的至少一种,但不限于此。另外,根据示例性实施例,超声波图像可以是2D图像,3D图像或4D图像。The ultrasound image may include at least one of a B-mode image, a C-mode image, a D-mode image, an M-mode image, and an elastic-mode image, but is not limited thereto. Also, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic image may be a 2D image, a 3D image or a 4D image.

在操作S1320中,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像有关的多个控制项目。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示用于调整与在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像相关的参数值的多个控制项目。In operation S1320, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image on the second display unit 200 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items for adjusting parameter values related to the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 on the second display unit 200 .

与超声波图像有关的多个控制项目可以包括诸如频率,动态范围,帧平均,拒绝级别,灰度图,空间比例,动态磁共振(DMR+),谐波,扫描区域,边缘增强,速度,功率,线密度,全光谱图像(FSI),焦点数量,深度值和时间增益补偿(TGC)的项目中的至少一个,但不限于此。Multiple control items related to ultrasound images can include such as frequency, dynamic range, frame average, rejection level, grayscale, spatial scale, dynamic magnetic resonance (DMR+), harmonics, scan area, edge enhancement, speed, power, At least one of the items of line density, full spectrum image (FSI), focal point number, depth value and time gain compensation (TGC), but not limited thereto.

频率项目可以表示用于改变施加到探头20的发送/接收频率的项目。例如,用户可以选择穿透(Pen,低频),一般(Gen,一般频率)和分辨率(Res,高频)中的一个来调整频率。The frequency item may indicate an item for changing the transmission/reception frequency applied to the probe 20 . For example, the user can select one of penetration (Pen, low frequency), general (Gen, general frequency) and resolution (Res, high frequency) to adjust the frequency.

动态范围项目是用于通过改变输入信号的最小值和最大值之间的比率来调整对比度的项目。例如,用户可以选择从50到200的范围内的值来设定动态范围的参数值。The dynamic range item is an item for adjusting the contrast by changing the ratio between the minimum and maximum values of the input signal. For example, the user may select a value ranging from 50 to 200 to set the parameter value of the dynamic range.

帧平均项目是用于减少超声波图像中的随机噪声的项目。例如,用户可以选择从0到15的范围内的值来设置帧平均的参数值。The frame averaging item is an item for reducing random noise in ultrasound images. For example, a user can select a value ranging from 0 to 15 to set a parameter value for frame averaging.

拒绝级别项目是用于移除超声波图像中的噪声的项目。例如,用户可以选择从1到32的范围内的值来设置拒绝级别值。The rejection level item is an item for removing noise in the ultrasound image. For example, a user can select a value ranging from 1 to 32 to set a reject level value.

灰度图项目是通过改变超声波图像的后曲线来确定灰度的项目。例如,用户可以选择从1到13的范围内的值来设定灰度图的参数值。The grayscale item is an item for determining the grayscale by changing the back curve of the ultrasound image. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 1 to 13 to set the parameter value of the grayscale image.

空间比例项目是用于调整超声波图像的密度的项目。例如,用户可以选择低/中/高中的一个来设置空间比例的参数值。The spatial scale item is an item for adjusting the density of the ultrasound image. For example, the user can select one of low/medium/high to set the parameter value of the space scale.

DMR+项目是用于后处理超声波图像的项目,并且可以是用于降低噪声并增强边缘的参数。例如,用户可以选择从1到5的范围内的值来设定DMR+的参数值。The DMR+ item is an item for post-processing ultrasound images, and can be a parameter for noise reduction and edge enhancement. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 1 to 5 to set the parameter value of DMR+.

谐波项目是通过使用高频来优化超声波图像的项目。例如,用户可以选择开和关中的一个来设置谐波项目的参数值。Harmonic items are items that optimize ultrasound images by using high frequencies. For example, the user can select one of ON and OFF to set the parameter value of the harmonic item.

扫描区域项目是用于调整超声波图像的横向宽度(%)的项目。例如,用户可以选择从40到100的范围内的值来调整扫描区域的宽度。The scan area item is an item for adjusting the lateral width (%) of the ultrasonic image. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 40 to 100 to adjust the width of the scan area.

边缘增强项目是用于锐化组织或器官边界的项目。例如,用户可以选择从-3到3的范围内的值来设置边缘增强项目的参数值。Edge enhancement items are items for sharpening the boundaries of tissues or organs. For example, a user can select a value ranging from -3 to 3 to set a parameter value for an edge enhancement item.

速度项目是通过调整器官的速度来提高分辨率的项目。例如,用户可以选择从1440到1620(m/s)的范围内的值来调整速度水平的值。The speed item is an item that improves the resolution by adjusting the speed of the organ. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 1440 to 1620 (m/s) to adjust the value of the velocity level.

功率项目是用于选择超声波输出的强度的项目。例如,用户可以选择从10到100的范围内的值来调整功率值。The power item is an item for selecting the intensity of ultrasonic output. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 10 to 100 to adjust the power value.

线密度项目是用于调整超声波图像的密度的项目。例如,用户可以选择低/中1/中2/高中的一个来调整线密度值。The line density item is an item for adjusting the density of the ultrasonic image. For example, users can choose one of Low/Medium 1/Medium 2/High to adjust the line density value.

FSI项目是用于调整混合频率比的项目。例如,用户可以选择从1到3的范围内的值来设定FSI1370的参数值。The FSI item is an item for adjusting the mixing frequency ratio. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 1 to 3 to set the parameter value of the FSI 1370 .

焦点数量项目是用于设置焦点的位置和焦点数量的项目。例如,用户可以选择从1到4的范围内的值来调整焦点数量。The focus number item is an item for setting the position of the focus and the focus number. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 1 to 4 to adjust the amount of focus.

增益项目是用于调整超声波图像的亮度的项目。例如,用户可以选择从1到100范围内的值来调整增益值。The gain item is an item for adjusting the brightness of the ultrasonic image. For example, the user can select a value ranging from 1 to 100 to adjust the gain value.

深度项目是用于调整被扫描的超声波图像的深度的项目。根据示例性实施例的深度值可以根据探头20的种类而变化。例如,如果超声波设备1000的探头20是凸形探头,则用户可以选择从6cm到30cm的范围内的深度值。The depth item is an item for adjusting the depth of the scanned ultrasonic image. The depth value according to an exemplary embodiment may vary according to the kind of the probe 20 . For example, if the probe 20 of the ultrasonic device 1000 is a convex probe, the user can select a depth value ranging from 6cm to 30cm.

TGC项目是用于根据人体的深度来补偿超声波的传播程度的降低的项目。例如,用户可以通过移动与多个深度部分相对应的滑动条上的调整按钮来调整TGC值。The TGC item is an item for compensating for a decrease in the propagation degree of ultrasonic waves according to the depth of the human body. For example, a user can adjust the TGC value by moving an adjustment button on a slider bar corresponding to a plurality of depth sections.

根据示例性实施例,用于调整与在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像相关的参数值的多个控制项目可以显示在多个页面中。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一页面上显示第一项目到第十项目,并且可以在第二页面上显示第十一项目到第二十项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, a plurality of control items for adjusting parameter values related to an ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 may be displayed in a plurality of pages. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display first to tenth items on the first page, and may display eleventh to twentieth items on the second page.

在操作S1330中,超声波设备1000可以基于指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置,从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个控制项目中选择至少一个控制项目。In operation S1330, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may select at least one control item from a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 based on the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器识别指示物400触摸第二显示单元200。这里,触摸可以包括接触式触摸和非接触式触摸(悬停)。此外,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器感测指示物400的触摸位置。这里,至少一个传感器可以是触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外传感器中的至少一个,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may recognize that the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 via at least one sensor. Here, the touch may include contact touch and non-contact touch (hover). In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the touch position of the pointer 400 via at least one sensor. Here, the at least one sensor may be at least one of a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor, but is not limited thereto.

由于超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法在上面参照图5至8描述,因此省略其详细描述。Since the method of sensing the position of the pointer 400 by the ultrasonic device 1000 is described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 , a detailed description thereof is omitted.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以从多个控制项目中选择位于距指示物400的触摸位置预定距离内的至少一个控制项目。例如,超声波设备1000可以选择位于距指示物400的触摸位置5cm半径内的第一项目,第二项目,第三项目和第四项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select at least one control item located within a predetermined distance from the touch position of the pointer 400 from a plurality of control items. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select a first item, a second item, a third item, and a fourth item located within a radius of 5 cm from the touch position of the pointer 400 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个菜单组中选择与指示物400的位置相对应的菜单组,以便确定至少一个控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select a menu group corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 from among a plurality of menu groups displayed on the second display unit 200 in order to determine at least one control item.

例如,如果指示物400的触摸位置与第一菜单组重叠,则超声波设备1000可以从多个控制项目中选择包括在第一菜单组中的第一菜单项目,第二菜单项目,第三菜单项目,第四菜单项目和第五菜单项目。For example, if the touch position of the pointer 400 overlaps with the first menu group, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select a first menu item, a second menu item, a third menu item included in the first menu group from a plurality of control items. , the fourth menu item and the fifth menu item.

在操作S1340中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示确定的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符以及超声波图像。In operation S1340, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the determined at least one control item and an indicator indicating the location of the pointer 400 and the ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在该至少一个控制项目上标记指示符。例如,如果指示物400位于显示在第二显示单元200上的至少一个控制项目中的第一项目,则超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上的第一项目上标记指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator on the at least one control item. For example, if the pointer 400 is located at a first item among at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark the indicator on the first item on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,由于指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置改变,超声波设备1000可以改变指示物在第一显示单元100上的位置。According to an exemplary embodiment, since the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 is changed, the ultrasonic device 1000 may change the position of the pointer on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符显示为覆盖在在第一显示单元100的超声波图像上。这里,超声波设备1000可以基于预定义的透明度信息来确定显示在超声波图像上的至少一个控制项目的透明度,并且可以根据确定的透明度将至少一个控制项目显示为透明的。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item and an indicator indicating a position of the pointer 400 to be overlaid on the ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 . Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine the transparency of at least one control item displayed on the ultrasound image based on predefined transparency information, and may display the at least one control item as transparent according to the determined transparency.

除此之外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目,以便不覆盖在超声波图像上。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域上显示包括指示符的至少一个控制项目。下面将参照图14描述超声波设备1000的用于在第一显示单元上显示至少一个控制项目以便不覆盖在超声波图像上的操作。。Besides, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display at least one control item on the first display unit 100 so as not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image. For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on a first area of the first display unit 100 and may display at least one control item including an indicator on a second area of the first display unit 100 . An operation of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 for displaying at least one control item on the first display unit so as not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image will be described below with reference to FIG. 14 . .

图14是示出超声波设备1000在主屏幕上显示在触摸屏上显示的一些控制项目的示例的图。在图14中,作为示例,假设第一显示单元100是超声波图像显示在其上的主屏幕,并且第二显示单元200是控制项目显示在其上的触摸屏。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 displays some control items displayed on the touch screen on the home screen. In FIG. 14 , as an example, it is assumed that the first display unit 100 is a main screen on which an ultrasound image is displayed, and the second display unit 200 is a touch screen on which control items are displayed.

超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像,并且在第二显示单元200上显示多个控制项目。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 and display a plurality of control items on the second display unit 200 .

这里,超声波设备1000可以通过使用指示物400接收从第二显示单元200上显示的多个控制项目中触摸梯形项目1401的输入1410。超声波设备1000可以从多个控制项目中选择包括梯形项目1401的第一菜单组1402,其中第一菜单组1402可以包括例如谐波项目,脉冲Inv项目,梯形项目1401,双活动项目和ADVR项目。Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input 1410 of touching a ladder item 1401 from among a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 by using the pointer 400 . The ultrasonic device 1000 may select a first menu group 1402 including a trapezoidal item 1401 from a plurality of control items, wherein the first menu group 1402 may include, for example, a harmonic item, a pulse Inv item, a trapezoidal item 1401, a dual activity item, and an ADVR item.

超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示第一菜单组1402。这里,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的右侧显示第一菜单组1402,以便不与显示在第一显示单元100的左侧的超声波图像1404重叠。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a first menu group 1402 on the first display unit 100 . Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the first menu group 1402 on the right side of the first display unit 100 so as not to overlap the ultrasound image 1404 displayed on the left side of the first display unit 100 .

超声波设备1000可以显示指示指示物400在第一显示单元100上的当前位置的指示符1403。由于指示物400位于第二显示单元200上的梯形项目1401上,所以超声波设备1000可以将指示物1403表示为在第一显示单元100上显示的第一菜单组1402中的梯形项目1402周围的边界。The ultrasonic device 1000 may display an indicator 1403 indicating a current position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 . Since the pointer 400 is located on the trapezoidal item 1401 on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 can represent the pointer 1403 as a border around the trapezoidal item 1402 in the first menu group 1402 displayed on the first display unit 100 .

如果用户与第二显示单元200接触地拖动指示物400,则超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符1043。If the user drags the pointer 400 in contact with the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 1043 according to the movement of the pointer 400 .

根据示例性实施例,如果第二显示单元200上的触摸事件在未显示控制项目的空白处结束,则可以移除显示在第一显示单元100上的第一菜单组1402。According to an exemplary embodiment, if a touch event on the second display unit 200 ends at a blank space where control items are not displayed, the first menu group 1402 displayed on the first display unit 100 may be removed.

例如,如果用户将他/她的已经接触梯形项目1401的手指移开,并将他/她的手指从梯形项目1401旁边的空白空间处从第二显示单元200取走,然后通过他/她的手指触摸在第二显示单元200上显示的身体制作者项目,则超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示包括身体制作者项目的第二菜单组,而不是第一菜单组1402,其中第二菜单组可以包括例如四项目,身体制作者项目,注释项目,双重项目和键盘项目。For example, if the user removes his/her finger that has been in contact with the ladder item 1401, and takes his/her finger away from the second display unit 200 from the blank space next to the ladder item 1401, and then passes his/her When the finger touches the body maker item displayed on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the second menu group including the body maker item on the first display unit 100 instead of the first menu group 1402, wherein the first The second menu group may include, for example, a quad item, a body maker item, an annotation item, a dual item, and a keyboard item.

图15是示出超声波设备1000显示对应于从至少一个控制项目选择的控制项目的窗口的方法的流程图。FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a method of the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 displaying a window corresponding to a control item selected from at least one control item.

根据示例性实施例,图15的操作S1510可以在图13的操作S1340之后执行。因此,在图15中,下面将描述在第一显示单元100上显示第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置的指示符以及超声波图像的示例。According to an exemplary embodiment, operation S1510 of FIG. 15 may be performed after operation S1340 of FIG. 13 . Therefore, in FIG. 15 , displaying on the first display unit 100 at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 and an indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 and an ultrasonic image will be described below. example of .

在操作S1510中,超声波设备1000可以接收在第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目上拖动指示物400的拖动手势。例如,超声波设备1000可以通过使用触摸传感器,压力传感器或相机来感测指示物400在第二显示单元200上拖动的位置。In operation S1510, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a drag gesture of dragging the pointer 400 on at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a position where the pointer 400 is dragged on the second display unit 200 by using a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, or a camera.

在操作S1520中,超声波设备1000可以基于用于拖动指示物400的拖动手势来改变指示符在第一显示单元100上显示的至少一个控制项目上的位置。例如,如果第二显示单元200上的指示物400被拖动到左侧(例如,从第二控制项目朝向第一控制项目),则超声波设备1000可以将第一显示单元100上的指示符移动到左侧(例如,从第二控制项目朝向第一控制项目)。In operation S1520, the ultrasonic device 1000 may change the position of the pointer on at least one control item displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the drag gesture for dragging the pointer 400 . For example, if the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 is dragged to the left (for example, from the second control item toward the first control item), the ultrasonic device 1000 can move the pointer on the first display unit 100 To the left (eg, from the second control item toward the first control item).

在操作S1530中,超声波设备1000可以感测触摸事件已经在第二显示单元200上显示的第一控制项目上结束。In operation S1530 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense that a touch event has ended on the first control item displayed on the second display unit 200 .

例如,超声波设备1000可以通过使用触摸传感器(感测电容的变化),压力传感器(感测压力的变化)或相机(分析图像帧)来感测用户将他/她的手指在第一控制项上从第二显示单元200取走。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以确定用户选择第一控制项目。For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense that the user places his/her finger on the first control item by using a touch sensor (sensing a change in capacitance), a pressure sensor (sensing a change in pressure) or a camera (analyzing an image frame). Take it away from the second display unit 200 . In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine that the user selects the first control item.

在操作S1540中,当触摸事件在第一控制项目上结束时,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示与第一控制项目有关的窗口。In operation S1540, when the touch event ends on the first control item, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a window related to the first control item on the second display unit 200 .

这里,窗口可以是用于调整第一控制项目的参数值的GUI,包括与第一控制项相关的信息或内容的窗口,与第一控制项目相关的图标或测量工具(例如,宽度测量,长度测量,环绕测量等),但不限于此。Here, the window may be a GUI for adjusting the parameter value of the first control item, a window including information or content related to the first control item, an icon or a measurement tool (for example, width measurement, length, etc.) related to the first control item measurement, surround measurement, etc.), but not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000还可以在第一显示单元100上显示与第一控制项目相关的窗口。这里,超声波设备1000可以在显示在第一显示单元100上的窗口中标记指示指示物400的当前位置的指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may also display a window related to the first control item on the first display unit 100 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator indicating the current location of the pointer 400 in a window displayed on the first display unit 100 .

下面将参照图16至18描述超声波设备1000的用于显示与从至少一个控制项目中选择的控制项目相对应的窗口的操作。An operation of the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 for displaying a window corresponding to a control item selected from at least one control item will be described below with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18 .

图16是示出超声波设备1000根据拖动手势来移动指示符的示例的图。FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 moves a pointer according to a drag gesture.

参考图16,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示多个控制项目。这里,超声波设备1000可以通过使用指示物400从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个控制项目中接收到梯形项目1601上的触摸输入。超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示多个控制项目中的包括梯形项目1601的第一菜单组,其中第一菜单组可以包括谐波项目,脉冲Inv项目,梯形项目1601,双活动项目和ADVR项目。Referring to FIG. 16 , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items on the second display unit 200 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a touch input on the ladder item 1601 from among a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 by using the pointer 400 . The ultrasonic device 1000 can display a first menu group including a trapezoidal item 1601 among a plurality of control items on the first display unit 100, wherein the first menu group can include a harmonic item, a pulse Inv item, a trapezoidal item 1601, and a double active item and ADVR items.

这里,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域1604上显示第一菜单组,以便不将第一菜单组与显示在第一显示单元100的第一区域1603上的超声波图像重叠。Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the first menu group on the second region 1604 of the first display unit 100 so as not to overlap the first menu group with the ultrasound image displayed on the first region 1603 of the first display unit 100 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以显示指示指示物400在第一显示单元100上的当前位置的指示符1605。例如,如果指示物400位于第二显示单元200上的梯形项目1601上,所以超声波设备1000可以将指示物1605标记为在第二区域1604上显示的第一菜单组中的梯形项目1402周围的边界线。Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an indicator 1605 indicating a current position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the pointer 400 is located on the trapezoidal item 1601 on the second display unit 200, so the ultrasound device 1000 may mark the pointer 1605 as a border around the trapezoidal item 1402 in the first menu group displayed on the second area 1604 Wire.

如果用户与第二显示单元200接触地拖动指示物400,则超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符1605。例如,如果用户将指示物400从梯形项目1601拖动到ADVR项目1602上,则超声波设备1000感测拖动手势,并且将第一显示单元100上的指示符1605从梯形项目1601向ADVR项目1602移动。If the user drags the pointer 400 in contact with the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 1605 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, if the user drags the pointer 400 from the ladder item 1601 to the ADVR item 1602, the ultrasonic device 1000 senses the drag gesture, and moves the indicator 1605 on the first display unit 100 from the ladder item 1601 to the ADVR item 1602. move.

图17是示出超声波设备1000基于触摸结束事件来选择控制项目的示例的图。FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 selects a control item based on a touch-up event.

参考图17,超声波设备1000可以感测触摸事件已经在第二显示单元200上显示的ADVR项目1602上结束(1710)。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以确定用户从多个控制项目中选择ADVR项目1602。Referring to FIG. 17 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense that a touch event has ended on the ADVR item 1602 displayed on the second display unit 200 ( 1710 ). In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine that the user selects the ADVR item 1602 from a plurality of control items.

图18是示出超声波设备1000显示与选择的控制项目对应的窗口1810的示例的图。FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays a window 1810 corresponding to a selected control item.

参考图18,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示与ADVR项目1602相关的窗口1810。这里,与ADVR项目1602相关的窗口1810可以包括记录按钮(用于开始记录操作的按钮),记录停止按钮,关闭会话按钮(用于终止记录模式的按钮),播放按钮(用于再现记录的视频的按钮),速度按钮(用于设置倒带速度或快进功能的按钮),关闭托盘按钮(用于关闭介质托盘的按钮),弹出托盘按钮(用于打开介质托盘的按钮)等,但不限于此。Referring to FIG. 18 , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a window 1810 related to the ADVR item 1602 on the second display unit 200 . Here, the window 1810 related to the ADVR item 1602 may include a record button (a button for starting a recording operation), a recording stop button, a close session button (a button for terminating a recording mode), a play button (a button for reproducing a recorded video button), speed button (button for setting the rewind speed or fast-forward function), close tray button (button for closing the media tray), eject tray button (button for opening the media tray), etc., but not limited to this.

此外,如果触摸事件已经在第二显示单元200上显示的ADVR项目1602上结束(1710),则超声波设备1000可能不再在第一显示单元100的第二区域1820上显示第一菜单组。Also, if the touch event has ended on the ADVR item 1602 displayed on the second display unit 200 (1710), the ultrasound device 1000 may no longer display the first menu group on the second area 1820 of the first display unit 100.

虽然在图18中未示出,但是根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域1820上显示与在第二显示单元200上显示的ADVR项目1602相关的窗口1810。Although not shown in FIG. 18 , according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a window 1810 related to the ADVR item 1602 displayed on the second display unit 200 on the second area 1820 of the first display unit 100 .

稍后将参照图20C描述超声波设备1000的用于在第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200上显示与所选择的控制项目相关的窗口的操作。An operation of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 for displaying a window related to a selected control item on the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 will be described later with reference to FIG. 20C .

图19是示出超声波设备1000根据用户的触摸手势来改变指示符的位置或选择控制项目的方法的图。FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a method in which the ultrasonic device 1000 changes a position of an indicator or selects a control item according to a user's touch gesture.

图19的操作S1910可以在图13的操作S1340之后执行。因此,在图19中,作为示例,将描述在第一显示单元100上与超声波图像一起显示第二显示单元200上显示的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置的指示符的情况。Operation S1910 of FIG. 19 may be performed after operation S1340 of FIG. 13 . Therefore, in FIG. 19, as an example, displaying at least one control item displayed on the second display unit 200 and indicating the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 together with the ultrasonic image on the first display unit 100 will be described. The status of the indicator.

在操作S1910中,超声波设备1000可以经由第二显示单元200感测关于至少一个控制项目的第一手势。这里,第一手势可以表示用于移动指示符的手势,该指示符指示指示物400的位置。例如,第一手势可以包括拖动手势,悬停手势等,但不限于此。In operation S1910, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a first gesture with respect to at least one control item via the second display unit 200 . Here, the first gesture may represent a gesture for moving an indicator indicating the location of the pointer 400 . For example, the first gesture may include a drag gesture, a hover gesture, etc., but is not limited thereto.

在操作S1920中,超声波设备1000可以根据第一手势来改变显示在第一显示单元上的指示符的位置。例如,如果指示物400向左侧拖动,则指示符也可以移动到左侧。In operation S1920, the ultrasonic device 1000 may change the position of the indicator displayed on the first display unit according to the first gesture. For example, if pointer 400 is dragged to the left, the pointer may also move to the left.

在操作S1930中,超声波设备1000可以经由第二显示单元200感测关于第一控制项目的第二手势。In operation S1930, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a second gesture with respect to the first control item via the second display unit 200 .

这里,第二手势与用于移动指示符的第一手势不同,并且可以表示用于选择控制项目的手势。例如,如果第一手势是拖动手势,则第二手势可以是触摸并保持手势,双击手势和多手指手势中的一个,但不限于此。除此之外,如果第一手势是悬停手势,则第二手势可以是用于接触第二显示单元200的触摸手势,但不限于此。Here, the second gesture is different from the first gesture for moving the pointer, and may represent a gesture for selecting a control item. For example, if the first gesture is a drag gesture, the second gesture may be one of a touch and hold gesture, a double-tap gesture and a multi-finger gesture, but not limited thereto. Besides, if the first gesture is a hover gesture, the second gesture may be a touch gesture for contacting the second display unit 200, but is not limited thereto.

超声波设备1000可以在感测到第一控制项目上的第二手势时,确定用户从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。The ultrasonic device 1000 may determine that the user selects the first control item from the plurality of control items when sensing the second gesture on the first control item.

在操作S1940中,超声波设备1000可以根据第二手势在第二显示单元200上显示与第一控制项目相关的窗口。这里,窗口可以是用于调整第一控制项目的参数值的GUI,包括与第一控制项相关的信息或内容的窗口,与第一控制项目相关的图标或测量工具(例如,宽度测量,长度测量和圆周测量),但不限于此。In operation S1940, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a window related to the first control item on the second display unit 200 according to the second gesture. Here, the window may be a GUI for adjusting the parameter value of the first control item, a window including information or content related to the first control item, an icon or a measurement tool (for example, width measurement, length, etc.) related to the first control item measurement and circumference measurement), but not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200上显示与第一项目相关的用户界面。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a user interface related to the first item on the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示与第一控制项目相关的多个用户界面中的第一用户界面,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与第一控制项目相关的多个用户界面中第二用户界面。例如,如果第一控制项目是TGC项目,则超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示包括用于设置与多个深度部分对应的TGC值的多个滑动条的设置窗口,并且可以在第一显示单元100上显示通过连接与多个深度部分相对应的TGC值获得的增益线界面。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a first user interface among a plurality of user interfaces related to the first control item on the first display unit 100 , and may display a plurality of user interfaces related to the first control item on the second display unit 200 . The second user interface in the first user interface. For example, if the first control item is a TGC item, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a setting window including a plurality of slide bars for setting TGC values corresponding to a plurality of depth sections on the second display unit 200, and may A gain line interface obtained by connecting TGC values corresponding to a plurality of depth sections is displayed on a display unit 100 .

在下文中,将参照图20A至20D描述第一手势是拖动手势并且第二手势是双击手势的情况,并且将参照图21A至21C描述第一手势是悬停手势并且第二手势是触摸手势的情况。Hereinafter, the case where the first gesture is a drag gesture and the second gesture is a double-tap gesture will be described with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20D , and the first gesture is a hover gesture and the second gesture is a touch gesture will be described with reference to FIGS. 21A to 21C . Gesture situation.

图20A至20D是示出超声波设备1000根据经由触摸屏接收的用户的触摸手势来选择控制项目并在主屏幕上显示与该控制项目相对应的窗口的示例的图。20A to 20D are diagrams illustrating an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 selects a control item and displays a window corresponding to the control item on a home screen according to a user's touch gesture received via a touch screen.

参考图20A,超声波设备1000可以接收推动包括在第二显示单元200中的第一按钮2001的用户输入。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以激活在第一显示单元100上显示在第二显示单元200上显示的多个控制项目中的一些的功能。Referring to FIG. 20A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive a user input of pushing a first button 2001 included in the second display unit 200 . In this case, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may activate a function of displaying on the first display unit 100 some of the plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 .

在第一按钮2001被推动之后,超声波设备1000可以通过使用指示物400,从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个控制项目中接收用于触摸身体标记项目2002的触摸手势。身体标记可以代表表示超声波被照射的位置的图像或对象。身体标记的示例可以包括肝脏形状,心脏形状,子宫形状,乳房形状等。After the first button 2001 is pushed, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a touch gesture for touching the body marking item 2002 from among a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 by using the pointer 400 . The body markers may represent images or objects representing locations where ultrasound waves are irradiated. Examples of body markers may include liver shape, heart shape, uterus shape, breast shape, etc.

超声波设备1000可以根据触摸手势在第一显示单元100上显示包括身体标记项目2002的控制项目组2004,其中控制项目组2004可以包括四项目,身体标记项目2002,注释项目,双重项目和键盘项目。这里,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像2003上显示控制项目组2004。The ultrasonic device 1000 may display a control item group 2004 including a body mark item 2002 on the first display unit 100 according to a touch gesture, wherein the control item group 2004 may include four items, a body mark item 2002, an annotation item, a double item and a keyboard item. Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 can display the control item group 2004 on the ultrasonic image 2003 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以标记指示指示物400在第一显示单元100上的当前位置的指示符2005。例如,由于指示物400位于第二显示单元200上的身体标记项目2002上,所以超声波设备1000可以将指示符2005标记为在第一显示单元100上显示的控制项目组2004中的身体标记项目2002上的星形。Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator 2005 indicating the current position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 . For example, since the indicator 400 is located on the body marker item 2002 on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark the indicator 2005 as the body marker item 2002 in the control item group 2004 displayed on the first display unit 100 star on.

当用户与第二显示单元200接触地拖动指示物400时,超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符2005。例如,当用户将指示物400从身体标记2002拖动到四项目时,超声波设备1000可以将指示物2005从身体标记项目2002移动到四项目。When the user drags the pointer 400 in contact with the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 2005 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, when the user drags the pointer 400 from the body marker 2002 to the quad item, the ultrasound device 1000 may move the pointer 2005 from the body marker item 2002 to the quad item.

参考图20B,超声波设备1000可以接收相对于身体标记项目2002的双击手势2006。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以确定用户从多个控制项目中选择身体标记项目2002。Referring to FIG. 20B , ultrasound device 1000 may receive double tap gesture 2006 relative to body marker item 2002 . In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine that the user selects the body marker item 2002 from a plurality of control items.

参考图20C,响应于双击手势2006,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示身体标记列表2007。超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示身体标记列表2008。Referring to FIG. 20C , in response to the double tap gesture 2006, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a body mark list 2007 on the second display unit 200. Referring to FIG. The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a body marker list 2008 on the first display unit 100 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以标记指示符2009,其指示指示物400在第一显示单元100的身体标记列表2008内的当前位置。例如,由于指示物400位于第二显示单元200上的第四身体标记上,所以超声波设备1000可以将指示符2009标记为在第一显示单元100上显示的身体标记列表2008中的第四身体标记上的星形。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator 2009 indicating a current position of the pointer 400 within the body mark list 2008 of the first display unit 100 . For example, since the indicator 400 is located on the fourth body marker on the second display unit 200, the ultrasound device 1000 may mark the indicator 2009 as the fourth body marker in the body marker list 2008 displayed on the first display unit 100 star on.

如果用户拖动(2010)指示物400与第二显示单元200接触,则超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符2009。例如,如果用户将指示物400从第一身体标记拖动(2010)到第四身体标记,则超声波设备1000可以将显示在第二显示单元200上的指示符2009从第一身体标记移动到第四身体标记。If the user drags ( 2010 ) the pointer 400 into contact with the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 2009 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, if the user drags (2010) the pointer 400 from the first body marker to the fourth body marker, the ultrasonic device 1000 can move the indicator 2009 displayed on the second display unit 200 from the first body marker to the fourth body marker. Four body markers.

超声波设备1000可以接收关于第四身体标记的双击手势2011。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以确定用户选择身体标记列表2007中的第四身体标记。The ultrasound device 1000 may receive a double tap gesture 2011 with respect to the fourth body marker. In this case, the ultrasound device 1000 may determine that the user selects the fourth body marker in the body marker list 2007 .

参考图20D,响应于双击手势2011,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的部分区域上显示第四身体标记2012。此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以存储超声波图像2003和第四身体标记之间的匹配信息。Referring to FIG. 20D , in response to a double tap gesture 2011 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a fourth body marker 2012 on a partial area of the first display unit 100 . Also, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound device 1000 may store matching information between the ultrasound image 2003 and the fourth body marker.

图21A至21C是示出超声波设备1000根据用户的悬停手势来移动指示符并根据用户的触摸手势来选择控制项目的示例的图。21A to 21C are diagrams illustrating an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 moves an indicator according to a user's hover gesture and selects a control item according to a user's touch gesture.

参考图21A,超声波设备1000可以在不接触第二显示单元200的情况下感测在预定高度(例如,0.5cm)内悬停(2101)在第二显示单元200上方的指示物400和指示物400的位置。Referring to FIG. 21A , the ultrasonic device 1000 can sense the pointer 400 hovering (2101) above the second display unit 200 within a predetermined height (for example, 0.5 cm) and the pointer 400 without touching the second display unit 200. 400 positions.

当感测到指示物400在第二显示单元200上方的悬停(2101)时,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示至少一个控制项目。例如,如果指示物400位于距色度项目2103的特定高度(例如2cm)处,则超声波设备1000可以确定包括色度图项目2103的菜单组2102。此外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示包括在菜单组2102中的多个项目(例如,清晰度索引,多视点索引,色度图2103,焦点,2D图像尺寸,扫描区域,频率,帧平均,灰度图和动态范围)。When the hovering of the pointer 400 over the second display unit 200 is sensed ( 2101 ), the ultrasonic device 1000 may display at least one control item on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the pointer 400 is located at a certain height (for example, 2 cm) from the chromaticity item 2103 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the menu group 2102 including the chromaticity diagram item 2103 . In addition, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of items included in the menu group 2102 (for example, resolution index, multi-viewpoint index, chromaticity map 2103, focus, 2D image size, scan area, frequency, etc.) on the first display unit 100. , frame average, grayscale and dynamic range).

例如,超声波设备1000可以在与超声波图像2100部分重叠的第一区域2104上显示包括在菜单组2102中的多个项目。这里,超声波设备1000可以基于第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200的屏幕尺寸之间的比率来确定显示在第一显示单元100上的多个项目的尺寸。For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of items included in the menu group 2102 on the first region 2104 partially overlapping the ultrasound image 2100 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the size of a plurality of items displayed on the first display unit 100 based on a ratio between screen sizes of the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 .

超声波设备1000可以标记指示指示物400在第一显示单元100上的当前位置的指示符2105。例如,如果指示物400位于距离色度图项目2103的特定高度(例如2cm)处,则超声波设备1000可以从显示在第一显示单元100的第一区域2104上的多个项目中标记色度图项目2103周围的方形形状的指示符2105。The ultrasonic device 1000 may mark the indicator 2105 indicating the current position of the pointer 400 on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located at a certain height (for example, 2 cm) from the chromaticity diagram item 2103, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark the chromaticity diagram from a plurality of items displayed on the first area 2104 of the first display unit 100 An indicator 2105 in the shape of a square around the item 2103.

参考图21B,超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符2105。例如,如果用户将指示物400从色度图项目2103上方悬停到焦点项目上方,则超声波设备1000可以将指示符2105从色度图项目2103移动到焦点项目上。Referring to FIG. 21B , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 2105 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, if the user hovers pointer 400 from above chromaticity diagram item 2103 to over the focused item, ultrasound device 1000 may move indicator 2105 from chromaticity diagram item 2103 onto the focused item.

参考图21C,当指示物400触摸显示在第二显示单元200上的焦点项目2106(2107)时,超声波设备1000可以感测焦点项目2106上的触摸手势。然后,超声波设备1000可以确定用户选择菜单组2102中的焦点项目2106。Referring to FIG. 21C , when the pointer 400 touches the focus item 2106 (2107) displayed on the second display unit 200, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a touch gesture on the focus item 2106. The ultrasound device 1000 may then determine that the user selected the focus item 2106 in the menu group 2102 .

图22是表示超声波设备1000以不同显示格式在多个显示单元上显示控制项目的方法的流程图。FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating a method for the ultrasonic device 1000 to display control items on a plurality of display units in different display formats.

在操作S2210中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像。In operation S2210, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将经由探头20获得的超声波图像实时地显示在第一显示单元100上。此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示预先存储在存储介质中的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display ultrasound images obtained via the probe 20 on the first display unit 100 in real time. In addition, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an ultrasonic image pre-stored in a storage medium on the first display unit 100 .

超声波图像可以是B模式图像,C模式图像,D模式图像,M模式图像和弹性模式图像中的至少一种,但不限于此。另外,根据示例性实施例,超声波图像可以是2D图像,3D图像或4D图像。The ultrasonic image may be at least one of a B-mode image, a C-mode image, a D-mode image, an M-mode image, and an elastic-mode image, but is not limited thereto. Also, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic image may be a 2D image, a 3D image or a 4D image.

在操作S2220中,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像有关的多个控制项目。In operation S2220, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image on the second display unit 200 .

例如,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示用于调整与在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像相关的参数值的多个控制项目。For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of control items for adjusting parameter values related to the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 on the second display unit 200 .

与超声波图像有关的多个控制项目可以包括诸如频率,动态范围,帧平均,拒绝级别,灰度图,空间比例,动态磁共振(DMR+)谐波,扫描区域,边缘增强,速度,功率,线密度,全光谱图像(FSI),焦点数量,深度值,时间增益补偿(TGC)的项目和身体标记中的至少一个,但不限于此。Multiple control items related to ultrasound images can include such as frequency, dynamic range, frame average, rejection level, grayscale, spatial scale, dynamic magnetic resonance (DMR+) harmonics, scan area, edge enhancement, speed, power, line At least one of density, full spectrum image (FSI), focal point number, depth value, time gain compensation (TGC) item and body marker, but not limited thereto.

在操作S2230中,超声波设备1000可以基于指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置,从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。In operation S2230, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select a first control item from a plurality of control items based on a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器识别指示物400触摸第二显示单元200。这里,触摸可以包括接触式触摸和非接触式触摸(悬停)。此外,超声波设备100可以经由至少一个传感器感测通过指示物400的触摸位置。这里,至少一个传感器可以包括触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外线传感器中的至少一个,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may recognize that the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 via at least one sensor. Here, the touch may include contact touch and non-contact touch (hover). In addition, the ultrasonic device 100 may sense a touch position by the pointer 400 via at least one sensor. Here, the at least one sensor may include at least one of a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor, but is not limited thereto.

超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法在上面参照图5至8描述,因此省略其详细描述。The method of the ultrasonic device 1000 sensing the position of the pointer 400 is described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

根据示例性实施例,当指示物400位于第一控制项目上方预定时间段或更长时间时,超声波设备1000可以从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。例如,当超声波设备1000接收到用他/她的手指触摸第一控制项目3秒以上的触摸并保持手势时,可以从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, when the pointer 400 is located above the first control item for a predetermined period of time or longer, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select the first control item from among the plurality of control items. For example, when the ultrasonic device 1000 receives a touch and hold gesture of touching the first control item with his/her finger for more than 3 seconds, the first control item may be selected from among the plurality of control items.

此外,如果指示物400触摸第一控制项目预定次数以上(例如两次或更多次),则超声波设备1000可以从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。例如,当超声波设备1000接收到用户用手指触摸第一控制项目两次以上的双击手势时,可以从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。Also, if the pointer 400 touches the first control item more than a predetermined number of times (for example, two or more times), the ultrasonic device 1000 may select the first control item from among the plurality of control items. For example, when the ultrasonic device 1000 receives a double-click gesture in which the user touches the first control item more than twice with a finger, the first control item may be selected from multiple control items.

当多个指示物触摸第一控制项目时,超声波设备1000可以从多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。例如,如果用户用两个或更多个手指触摸第一控制项目,则超声波设备1000可以从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。When a plurality of pointers touch the first control item, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select the first control item from among the plurality of control items. For example, if the user touches the first control item with two or more fingers, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select the first control item from among the plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 .

在操作S2240中,超声波设备1000可以确定与用于在第二显示单元200上显示第一控制项目的第一显示格式不同的第二显示格式。In operation S2240, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine a second display format different from the first display format for displaying the first control item on the second display unit 200.

根据示例性实施例,当与第一显示格式比较时,可以简化第二显示格式。这里,简化可以表示配置用户界面的元素(例如,调整图标)被减少。例如,第二显示格式可以提供具有较少复杂性的元素、减少数量的元素或控件等。此外,第二显示格式的控制可以与第一显示格式的控制相同,除了它们数量上被放大和/或缩小。According to an exemplary embodiment, the second display format may be simplified when compared with the first display format. Here, simplification may mean that elements configuring a user interface (eg, adjustment icons) are reduced. For example, the second display format may provide elements with less complexity, a reduced number of elements or controls, and the like. Furthermore, the controls of the second display format may be the same as those of the first display format, except that they are scaled up and/or down in magnitude.

根据示例性实施例,第一显示格式可以包括左和右条以及滑动条,并且第二显示格式可以包括滑动条。除此之外,第一显示格式可以是包括左和右条以及滑动条的方形形状,并且第二显示格式可以是具有多个部分的扇形。除此之外,第一显示格式可以包括多个滑动条,并且第二显示格式可以是连接多个滑动条的值的线。According to an exemplary embodiment, the first display format may include left and right bars and a slide bar, and the second display format may include a slide bar. Besides, the first display format may be a square shape including left and right bars and a slide bar, and the second display format may be a fan shape with a plurality of parts. Besides, the first display format may include a plurality of slider bars, and the second display format may be a line connecting values of the plurality of slider bars.

在操作S2250中,超声波设备1000可以与超声波图像一起在第一显示单元100上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目。In operation S2250, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the first control item in the second display format on the first display unit 100 together with the ultrasound image.

根据示例性实施例,如果超声波设备1000感测到在第二显示单元200上以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的触摸,则超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元200上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目,同时保持在第二显示单元200上以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the ultrasonic device 1000 senses a touch of the first control item displayed on the second display unit 200 in the first display format, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the first control item on the first display unit 200 in the second display format. format to display the first control item while maintaining the first control item displayed on the second display unit 200 in the first display format.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将第一显示单元100上的第一控制项目显示为覆盖在第一显示单元100的超声波图像上。这里,超声波设备1000可以基于预定义的透明度信息来确定在超声波图像上显示的第一控制项目的透明度,并且可以以确定的透明度显示第一控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the first control item on the first display unit 100 to be overlaid on the ultrasound image of the first display unit 100 . Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine the transparency of the first control item displayed on the ultrasound image based on predefined transparency information, and may display the first control item with the determined transparency.

除此之外,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示第一控制项目,以便不覆盖在超声波图像上。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目。Besides, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the first control item on the first display unit 100 so as not to be overlaid on the ultrasound image. For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on a first area of the first display unit 100 , and may display a first control item in a second display format on a second area of the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以基于第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200的屏幕尺寸之间的比率来确定以第二显示格式显示在第一显示单元100上的第一控制项目的尺寸。此外,超声波设备1000可以根据确定的尺寸以第二显示格式在第一显示单元100上显示第一控制项目。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the ratio of the first control item displayed on the first display unit 100 in the second display format based on the ratio between the screen sizes of the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 size. In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the first control item on the first display unit 100 in the second display format according to the determined size.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以感测触摸以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的指示物400的位置,并且可以将指示指示物400的位置的指示符标记在以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a position of the pointer 400 touching the first control item displayed in the first display format, and may mark an indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 in the second display format. displayed on the first control item.

根据示例性实施例,指示指示物400的位置的指示符可以被实现为预定义形状,预定义线,预定义颜色,预定义阴影等,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 may be implemented as a predefined shape, a predefined line, a predefined color, a predefined shade, etc., but is not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,由于指示物400的位置在以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目上被改变,所以超声波设备1000可以移动以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上的指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, since the position of the pointer 400 is changed on the first control item displayed in the first display format, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer on the first control item displayed in the second display format.

例如,超声波设备1000可以接收在以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目上拖动指示物400的拖动输入,并且可以根据拖动输入来改变以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上的指示符的位置。For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a drag input of dragging the pointer 400 on the first control item displayed in the first display format, and may change the position on the first control item displayed in the second display format according to the drag input. The position of the indicator.

图23A至23C是示出超声波设备1000显示用于将灰度图的水平设置为在第一显示单元和第二显示单元上不同的控制项目的示例的图。23A to 23C are diagrams showing an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays control items for setting the level of the grayscale image to be different on the first display unit and the second display unit.

参考图23A,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像2300,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像2300相关的多个控制项目。Referring to FIG. 23A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image 2300 on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image 2300 on the second display unit 200 .

超声波设备1000可以接收通过使用指示物400来触摸多个控制项目中的灰度图项目2301预定时间段或更长时间的触摸并保持手势。超声波设备1000可以根据触摸并保持手势2302从多个控制项目中选择灰度图项目2301。第二显示单元200上的灰度图项目2301可以显示为包括左键和右键以及滑动条的第一显示格式2303。The ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a touch and hold gesture of touching the grayscale item 2301 among the plurality of control items by using the pointer 400 for a predetermined period of time or more. The ultrasonic device 1000 may select a grayscale item 2301 from a plurality of control items according to a touch and hold gesture 2302 . The grayscale item 2301 on the second display unit 200 may be displayed in a first display format 2303 including left and right keys and a slide bar.

当超声波设备1000接收到在灰度图项目2301上的触摸并保持手势2302时,可以确定与第一显示格式2303不同的第二显示格式2304。与第一显示格式2303相比,第二显示格式2304具有简化的结构,并且可以包括表示灰度图的级别的滑动条。关于与第一显示格式2303对应的第二显示格式2304的信息可以被存储在存储器中。When the ultrasonic device 1000 receives a touch and hold gesture 2302 on the grayscale item 2301, a second display format 2304 different from the first display format 2303 may be determined. Compared with the first display format 2303, the second display format 2304 has a simplified structure, and may include a slide bar representing the level of the grayscale image. Information on the second display format 2304 corresponding to the first display format 2303 may be stored in the memory.

超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上以第二显示格式2304显示灰度图项目2301。这里,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以感测触摸以第一显示格式2303显示的灰度图项目2301的指示物400的位置,并且可以将指示指示物400的位置的指示符标记在以第二显示格式2304显示的灰度图项目2301上。例如,如果指示物400位于第一显示格式2303的灰度图项目2301的中心,并且由第一显示格式2303的中心表示的灰度图级别为7,则超声波设备1000可以将指示符2305标记在第二显示格式2304的灰度图级别表示7的位置。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a grayscale item 2301 in a second display format 2304 on the first display unit 100 . Here, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 touching the grayscale item 2301 displayed in the first display format 2303, and may mark an indicator indicating the position of the pointer 400 in The second display format 2304 is displayed on the grayscale item 2301 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located at the center of the grayscale item 2301 of the first display format 2303, and the grayscale level represented by the center of the first display format 2303 is 7, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark the indicator 2305 at The grayscale level of the second display format 2304 represents the position of 7.

参考图23B,如果用户与第二显示单元200接触地在灰度图项目2301内拖动指示物400(2306),则超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符2305。例如,如果用户在以第一显示格式2303显示的灰度图项目2301内将指示物400拖动到右侧(2306),则超声波设备1000可以在包括在第二显示格式中的滑动条上将指示物2305 2304移动到右侧。这里,超声波设备1000可以将灰度图级别2307从7调整到10。Referring to FIG. 23B , if the user drags the pointer 400 within the grayscale item 2301 in contact with the second display unit 200 ( 2306 ), the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 2305 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, if the user drags the pointer 400 to the right (2306) within the grayscale item 2301 displayed in the first display format 2303, the ultrasound device 1000 may drag the Indicators 2305 2304 move to the right. Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 can adjust the gray scale level 2307 from 7 to 10.

根据示例性实施例,当用户将他/她的眼睛固定在作为主屏幕的第一显示单元100上,用户用他/她的手指触摸第二显示单元200上的灰度图项目2301时,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上与超声波图像2300一起显示与灰度图项目2301对应的用户界面。在这种情况下,用户可以在将他/她的眼睛固定在作为主屏幕的第一显示单元100上的同时通过在第二显示单元200上执行简单的手势来调整灰度图级别。用户可以识别实时地通过与显示在第一显示单元100上的灰度图项目2301对应的用户界面来调整的灰度图级别。因此,用户的注视可以不被分散。According to an exemplary embodiment, when the user fixes his/her eyes on the first display unit 100 as the main screen, and the user touches the grayscale item 2301 on the second display unit 200 with his/her finger, an ultrasonic wave The device 1000 may display a user interface corresponding to the grayscale item 2301 on the first display unit 100 together with the ultrasound image 2300 . In this case, the user can adjust the grayscale level by performing a simple gesture on the second display unit 200 while fixing his/her eyes on the first display unit 100 as a main screen. The user may recognize the grayscale level adjusted through the user interface corresponding to the grayscale item 2301 displayed on the first display unit 100 in real time. Therefore, the user's gaze may not be distracted.

参考图23C,如果第一显示单元100包括触摸面板,则第一显示单元100可以感测到用户在第一显示单元100上拖动以第二显示格式2304显示的灰度图项目2301上的指示符2305的拖动手势2308。Referring to FIG. 23C, if the first display unit 100 includes a touch panel, the first display unit 100 may sense that the user drags an indication on the grayscale item 2301 displayed in the second display format 2304 on the first display unit 100. Drag gesture 2308 of symbol 2305.

超声波设备1000可以根据用于将指示符2305拖动到右侧的拖动手势2308将指示符2305移动到右侧,并且可以基于指示符2305的位置将灰度图级别2307从7调整到10。The ultrasound device 1000 may move the indicator 2305 to the right according to the drag gesture 2308 for dragging the indicator 2305 to the right, and may adjust the grayscale level 2307 from 7 to 10 based on the position of the indicator 2305 .

图24A至24C是示出超声波设备1000显示用于将频率设置为在第一显示单元和第二显示单元上不同的控制项目的示例的图。24A to 24C are diagrams illustrating an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displays control items for setting frequencies to be different on the first display unit and the second display unit.

参考图24A,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像2400,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像2400相关的多个控制项目。Referring to FIG. 24A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image 2400 on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image 2400 on the second display unit 200 .

超声波设备1000可以接收通过使用指示物400来触摸多个控制项目中的频率项目2401预定时间段或更长时间的触摸并保持手势。超声波设备1000可以根据触摸并保持手势2402从多个控制项目中选择频率项目2401。第二显示单元200上的频率项目2401可以以包括左键和右键以及滑动条的第一显示格式2403显示。The ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a touch and hold gesture of touching a frequency item 2401 among a plurality of control items by using the pointer 400 for a predetermined period of time or more. The ultrasonic device 1000 may select a frequency item 2401 from a plurality of control items according to a touch and hold gesture 2402 . The frequency item 2401 on the second display unit 200 may be displayed in a first display format 2403 including left and right keys and a slide bar.

当超声波设备1000接收到关于频率项目2401的触摸并保持手势2402时,可以确定与第一显示格式2403不同的第二显示格式2404。第二显示格式2404可以包括多个单元。关于与第一显示格式2403对应的第二显示格式2404的信息可以存储在存储器中。When the ultrasonic device 1000 receives a touch-and-hold gesture 2402 on a frequency item 2401 , a second display format 2404 different from the first display format 2403 may be determined. The second display format 2404 may include a plurality of cells. Information on the second display format 2404 corresponding to the first display format 2403 may be stored in a memory.

超声波设备1000可以以第二显示格式2404在第一显示单元100上显示频率项目2401。这里,以第二显示格式2404的频率项目2401可以与超声波图像2400部分重叠。例如,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像2400的非感兴趣区域上以第二显示格式2404显示频率项目2401。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a frequency item 2401 on the first display unit 100 in a second display format 2404 . Here, the frequency item 2401 in the second display format 2404 may partially overlap the ultrasound image 2400 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the frequency item 2401 in the second display format 2404 on the non-interest region of the ultrasound image 2400 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以感测触摸以第一显示格式2403显示的频率项目2401的指示物400的位置,并且可以将指示指示物400的位置的指示符2405标记在以第二显示格式2404显示的频率项目2401上。例如,如果指示物400的位置是第一显示格式2403的右侧,并且由第一显示格式2403的右侧表示的频率范围是“Res”(分辨率;高频),则超声波设备1000可以以特定颜色(例如,蓝色)以第二显示格式2404表示指示“Res”的单元。这里,特定颜色可能是指示符2405。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the position of the pointer 400 touching the frequency item 2401 displayed in the first display format 2403, and may mark the indicator 2405 indicating the position of the pointer 400 in the second display format 2403. The format 2404 is displayed on the frequency item 2401. For example, if the position of the pointer 400 is the right side of the first display format 2403, and the frequency range indicated by the right side of the first display format 2403 is "Res" (resolution; high frequency), the ultrasonic device 1000 can be displayed in Cells indicating "Res" are represented in the second display format 2404 in a particular color (eg, blue). Here, the specific color may be an indicator 2405 .

参考图24B,当用户与第二显示单元200接触地在频率项目2401内拖动(2406)指示物400时,超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符2405。例如,如果用户在以第一显示格式2403显示的频率项目2401内将指示物400拖动到左侧,则超声波设备1000可以将频率范围2407从“Res”改变到“Pen”(穿透;低频),并且可以将以第二显示格式2404的指示符2405移动到左侧。这里,指示符2405可以从“Res”单元移动到“Pen”单元2408上。Referring to FIG. 24B , when the user drags ( 2406 ) the pointer 400 within the frequency item 2401 in contact with the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 2405 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, if the user drags the pointer 400 to the left within the frequency item 2401 displayed in the first display format 2403, the ultrasonic device 1000 can change the frequency range 2407 from "Res" to "Pen" (penetration; low frequency ), and the indicator 2405 in the second display format 2404 may be moved to the left. Here, the indicator 2405 may be moved from the "Res" cell onto the "Pen" cell 2408 .

参考图24C,如果第一显示单元100包括触摸面板,则第一显示单元100可以感测到由用户施加的压力,该用户在第一显示单元100上移动以第二显示格式2404显示的频率项目2301上的指示符2405。例如,第一显示单元100可以感测到触摸包括在第二显示格式2404中的“Pen”单元2408预定时间段或更长时间的触摸并保持手势2409。Referring to FIG. 24C, if the first display unit 100 includes a touch panel, the first display unit 100 may sense pressure applied by a user who moves the frequency item displayed in the second display format 2404 on the first display unit 100. Indicator 2405 on 2301. For example, the first display unit 100 may sense a touch and hold gesture 2409 of touching a 'Pen' unit 2408 included in the second display format 2404 for a predetermined period of time or more.

根据触摸“Pen”单元2408预定时间段或更长时间的触摸并保持手势2409,超声波设备1000可以将指示符2405移动到“Pen”单元2408上,并且可以基于指示符2405的位置将频率范围2408从“Res”改变到“Pen”。According to the touch and hold gesture 2409 of touching the "Pen" unit 2408 for a predetermined period of time or longer, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the indicator 2405 onto the "Pen" unit 2408, and may move the frequency range 2408 based on the position of the indicator 2405. Change from "Res" to "Pen".

在下文中,将描述超声波设备1000的用于通过多个显示单元提供与增益值(例如,TGC或LGC)相关的界面的操作。Hereinafter, an operation of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 for providing an interface related to a gain value (eg, TGC or LGC) through a plurality of display units will be described.

图25是示出超声波设备1000通过使用多个显示单元提供关于增益值设置的信息的方法的流程图。FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a method in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 provides information on gain value settings by using a plurality of display units.

在操作S2510中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像。In operation S2510, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将经由探头20获得的超声波图像实时地显示在第一显示单元100上。根据一些示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示预先存储在存储介质中的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display ultrasound images obtained via the probe 20 on the first display unit 100 in real time. According to some exemplary embodiments, the ultrasound device 1000 may display ultrasound images pre-stored in a storage medium on the first display unit 100 .

超声波图像可以是B模式图像,C模式图像,D模式图像,M模式图像和弹性模式图像中的至少一种,但不限于此。另外,根据示例性实施例的超声波图像可以是2D图像,3D图像或4D图像。The ultrasound image may be at least one of a B-mode image, a C-mode image, a D-mode image, an M-mode image, and an elastic-mode image, but is not limited thereto. In addition, the ultrasonic image according to the exemplary embodiment may be a 2D image, a 3D image or a 4D image.

在操作S2520中,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示用于调整超声波回波信号的增益值的多个滑动条。这里,增益值可以包括时间增益补偿(TGC)值和横向增益补偿(LGC)值中的至少一个。TGC值是用于根据人体的深度来补偿超声波信号的幅度的减小。LGC值用于补偿由于超声波束的不同传送路径导致的不均匀衰减量。以下,将描述增益值为TGC值的情况。In operation S2520, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of slide bars for adjusting a gain value of the ultrasonic echo signal on the second display unit 200 . Here, the gain value may include at least one of a temporal gain compensation (TGC) value and a lateral gain compensation (LGC) value. The TGC value is used to compensate for the decrease in the amplitude of the ultrasonic signal according to the depth of the human body. The LGC value is used to compensate for the uneven attenuation due to the different transmission paths of the ultrasound beam. Hereinafter, the case where the gain value is the TGC value will be described.

根据示例性实施例,可以在第二显示单元200上显示包括用于调整与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值的多个滑动条的增益设置窗口。增益设置窗口可以是显示在第二显示单元200上的控制项目中的一个。According to an exemplary embodiment, a gain setting window including a plurality of slide bars for adjusting a gain value corresponding to a depth portion of an ultrasound image may be displayed on the second display unit 200 . The gain setting window may be one of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 .

多个滑动条可以在深度方向上以恒定间隔彼此平行地布置。显示在第二显示单元200上的多个滑动条的数量或间隔可以是固定的或可以是可变的。例如,多个滑动条的数量可以根据探头20的种类或超声波图像的总深度而变化。A plurality of slide bars may be arranged parallel to each other at constant intervals in the depth direction. The number or interval of the plurality of slide bars displayed on the second display unit 200 may be fixed or may be variable. For example, the number of the plurality of slide bars may vary according to the kind of the probe 20 or the total depth of the ultrasonic image.

例如,超声波设备1000可以将超声波图像的总深度分割为十个部分,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示十个滑动条。这里,十个滑动条中的最上面的滑动条对应于最浅深度的部分,并且最下面的滑动条可以对应于最深深度的部分。For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may divide the total depth of the ultrasound image into ten parts, and may display ten slide bars on the second display unit 200 . Here, the uppermost slider among the ten sliders corresponds to the shallowest depth portion, and the lowermost slider may correspond to the deepest depth portion.

用户可以在左或右方向上拖动显示在第二显示单元200上的多个滑动条的调整按钮,以改变相应深度部分的增益值。例如,如果用户将第一滑动条上的第一调整按钮移动到右侧,则与第一滑动条相对应的第一深度部分的增益值增加,因此第一深度部分的超声波图像可以变得更亮。相反,如果用户将第一滑动条上的第一调整按钮移动到左侧,则与第一滑动条相对应的第一深度部分的增益值减小,因此第一深度部分的超声波图像可以变得更暗。A user may drag adjustment buttons of a plurality of slide bars displayed on the second display unit 200 in a left or right direction to change a gain value of a corresponding depth portion. For example, if the user moves the first adjustment button on the first slide bar to the right, the gain value of the first depth part corresponding to the first slide bar increases, so the ultrasonic image of the first depth part can become more accurate. Bright. On the contrary, if the user moves the first adjustment button on the first slide bar to the left, the gain value of the first depth part corresponding to the first slide bar decreases, so the ultrasonic image of the first depth part can become darker.

用户可以点击多个滑动条中的每一个上的特定位置,以便改变每个深度部分的增益值。例如,如果用户点击第一滑动条上的第一点,则超声波设备1000可以将对应于第一滑动条的第一深度部分的增益值调整为对应于第一点的第一值。A user may click a specific location on each of the plurality of slider bars in order to change the gain value for each depth segment. For example, if the user clicks on the first point on the first slide bar, the ultrasonic device 1000 may adjust the gain value corresponding to the first depth portion of the first slide bar to the first value corresponding to the first point.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在包括多个滑动条的增益设置窗口内感测到用户在深度方向(即,垂直于至少一个滑动条的方向)上的拖动输入。超声波设备1000可以基于拖动输入的位置(例如,感测到拖动输入的像素的坐标)来改变分别对应于超声波图像的深度部分的增益值。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may sense a user's drag input in a depth direction (ie, a direction perpendicular to at least one slide bar) within a gain setting window including a plurality of slide bars. The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change gain values respectively corresponding to depth portions of the ultrasound image based on the position of the drag input (eg, the coordinates of the pixel at which the drag input is sensed).

例如,如果用户拖动他/她的手指同时在垂直于增益设置窗口中的多个滑动条的方向上形成直线或曲线,则超声波设备1000可以将调整按钮移动到拖动线和多个滑动条彼此交叉的位置,并且可以将与调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值设置为深度部分中的增益值。For example, if the user drags his/her finger while forming a straight line or a curved line in a direction perpendicular to the plurality of slider bars in the gain setting window, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the adjustment button to the drag line and the plurality of slider bars positions that cross each other, and the gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button can be set as the gain value in the depth section.

在操作S2530中,超声波设备1000可以基于触摸第二显示单元200的指示物400的位置来在第一显示单元100上显示增益线。例如,如果指示物400位于包括多个滑动条的增益设置窗口中,则超声波设备1000可以显示通过将第一显示单元100上的多个深度部分的增益值连接而获得的增益线。In operation S2530, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the gain line on the first display unit 100 based on the position of the pointer 400 touching the second display unit 200 . For example, if the pointer 400 is located in a gain setting window including a plurality of slide bars, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a gain line obtained by connecting gain values of a plurality of depth sections on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器识别指示物400触摸第二显示单元200。这里,触摸可以包括接触式触摸和非接触式触摸(悬停)。此外,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器感测指示物400的触摸位置。至少一个传感器可以是触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外线传感器中的至少一个,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may recognize that the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 via at least one sensor. Here, the touch may include contact touch and non-contact touch (hover). In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the touch position of the pointer 400 via at least one sensor. The at least one sensor may be at least one of a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor, but is not limited thereto.

超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法在上面参照图5至8描述,因此省略其详细描述。The method of the ultrasonic device 1000 sensing the position of the pointer 400 is described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以通过连接与多个滑动条中的调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值来生成增益线。这里,超声波设备1000可以通过使用第一滑动条上的增益值和第二滑动条上的增益值来执行第一滑动条和第二滑动条之间的增益值的插值计算。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may generate a gain line by connecting gain values corresponding to positions of adjustment buttons among a plurality of slide bars. Here, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may perform interpolation calculation of the gain value between the first slider bar and the second slider bar by using the gain value on the first slider bar and the gain value on the second slider bar.

根据示例性实施例,如果用户在包括多个滑动条的增益设置窗口上拖动直线或曲线,则超声波设备1000可以获得从拖动线获得的增益线。According to an exemplary embodiment, if a user drags a straight line or a curved line on a gain setting window including a plurality of slide bars, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may obtain a gain line obtained from the dragged line.

根据示例性实施例,如果指示物400触摸包括多个滑动条的增益设置窗口,则超声波设备1000可以与增益线一起在第一显示单元100上显示增益线。例如,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像上或超声波图像旁边显示增益线。这里,超声波设备1000可以与超声波图像的深度方向一起显示增益线。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the pointer 400 touches a gain setting window including a plurality of slide bars, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the gain line on the first display unit 100 together with the gain line. For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a gain line on or next to an ultrasound image. Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the gain line together with the depth direction of the ultrasound image.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示的增益线上的增益设置窗口中标记指示对应于指示物400的位置的深度部分的指示符。例如,如果指示物400位于第二滑动条上,则超声波设备1000可以确定与第二滑动条相对应的第二深度值,并且在增益线的指示第二深度值的点上标记指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may mark an indicator indicating a depth portion corresponding to a position of the pointer 400 in a gain setting window on a gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located on the second slide bar, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine a second depth value corresponding to the second slide bar, and mark an indicator on a point of the gain line indicating the second depth value.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400在包括多个滑动条的增益设置窗口内的位置的变化来移动在增益线上标记的指示符。例如,如果指示物400向下移动,则超声波设备1000可以随着增益线向下移动指示符。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may move an indicator marked on a gain line according to a change in a position of the indicator 400 within a gain setting window including a plurality of slide bars. For example, if the indicator 400 moves downward, the ultrasound device 1000 may move the indicator downward along with the gain line.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由第二显示单元200接收用于移动多个滑动条上的调整按钮中的至少一个调整按钮的输入,并且可以基于已经移动的至少一个调整按钮的位置来改变在第一显示单元100上显示的增益线的形状。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input for moving at least one adjustment button among the adjustment buttons on the plurality of slide bars via the second display unit 200, and may determine based on the position of the at least one adjustment button that has been moved. The shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 is changed.

根据示例性实施例的超声波设备1000在第一显示单元100上与超声波图像一起显示与用户在第二显示单元200上设置的增益值相对应的增益线,因此,用户可以直观地识别增益线的形状,增益线的倾斜度,增益值(例如,TGC值)等,而不移动他/她的眼睛。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 according to the exemplary embodiment displays the gain line corresponding to the gain value set by the user on the second display unit 200 together with the ultrasound image on the first display unit 100, and thus, the user can intuitively recognize the gain line shape, slope of the gain line, gain value (eg, TGC value), etc. without moving his/her eyes.

图26A和26B是示出超声波设备1000在触摸屏上提供增益设置窗口并在主屏幕上显示增益线的示例的图。26A and 26B are diagrams illustrating an example in which the ultrasound apparatus 1000 provides a gain setting window on a touch screen and displays a gain line on a home screen.

参考图26A,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像2600,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像2600相关的多个控制项目。Referring to FIG. 26A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image 2600 on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image 2600 on the second display unit 200 .

超声波设备1000可以接收通过使用指示物400来触摸第一区域预定时间段或更长时间的触摸并保持手势,第一区域中显示多个控制项目中的增益控制项目2601。超声波设备1000可以根据触摸并保持手势从多个控制项目中选择增益控制项目2601。这里,超声波设备1000可以通过连接分别对应于包括在增益控制项2601中的多个滑动条的增益值来生成增益线2603。例如,由于多个滑动条上的调整按钮位于中心部分,所以超声波设备1000可以将增益线2603生成为直线。The ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a touch and hold gesture of touching a first area in which a gain control item 2601 among a plurality of control items is displayed for a predetermined period of time or more by using the pointer 400 . The ultrasonic device 1000 may select a gain control item 2601 from a plurality of control items according to a touch and hold gesture. Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may generate the gain line 2603 by connecting gain values respectively corresponding to a plurality of slider bars included in the gain control item 2601 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may generate the gain line 2603 as a straight line since the adjustment buttons on the plurality of slide bars are located at the central portion.

超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示生成的增益线2603。例如,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像2600旁边显示增益线2603。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the generated gain line 2603 on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound device 1000 may display a gain line 2603 next to the ultrasound image 2600 .

然后,超声波设备1000可以标记指示符2604,其指示指示物400在增益线2603上的增益控制项目2601中的位置。例如,如果指示物400位于第五滑动条2602上,则超声波设备1000确定与第五滑动条2602相对应的第五深度值,并且在增益线2603上在表示第五深度值的第一点处标记指示符。Then, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator 2604 indicating the position of the indicator 400 in the gain control item 2601 on the gain line 2603 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located on the fifth slider bar 2602, the ultrasonic device 1000 determines the fifth depth value corresponding to the fifth slider bar 2602, and at the first point representing the fifth depth value on the gain line 2603 Flag indicator.

根据示例性实施例,如果指示物400的位置在增益控制项目2601内改变,则超声波设备1000可以移动标记在增益线2603上的指示符2604。例如,如果指示物400从第五滑动条2602移动到第六滑动条上,则超声波设备1000可以确定与第六滑动条相对应的第六深度值,并且可以将指示符2603从表示第五深度值的第一点移动到表示第六深度值的第二点。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the position of the pointer 400 is changed within the gain control item 2601 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the indicator 2604 marked on the gain line 2603 . For example, if the pointer 400 is moved from the fifth slide bar 2602 to the sixth slide bar, the ultrasonic device 1000 can determine the sixth depth value corresponding to the sixth slide bar, and can change the indicator 2603 from the fifth slide bar to indicate the fifth depth. The first point of the value moves to the second point representing the sixth depth value.

因此,用户可以通过在增益线2603上的指示符2604来识别第二显示单元200上的指示物400当前接触的位置,而不将他/她的眼睛从第一显示单元100移动到第二显示单元200。Therefore, the user can recognize the position currently touched by the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 through the indicator 2604 on the gain line 2603 without moving his/her eyes from the first display unit 100 to the second display unit 100. Unit 200.

参考图26B,当用户移动多个滑动条上的调整按钮的位置时,超声波设备1000可以接收用于设置分别对应于多个深度部分的增益值的输入。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用户在增益控制项目2601中沿垂直于多个滑动条的方向形成曲线的同时拖动他/她的手指的拖动手势2605。超声波设备1000可以根据拖动手势2605将调整按钮移动到拖动线和多个滑动条彼此交叉的点,并且将与调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值设置为相应的深度部分的增益值。Referring to FIG. 26B , when a user moves positions of adjustment buttons on a plurality of slide bars, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input for setting gain values respectively corresponding to a plurality of depth sections. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a drag gesture 2605 in which the user drags his/her finger while forming a curve in a direction perpendicular to a plurality of slide bars in the gain control item 2601 . The ultrasonic device 1000 may move the adjustment button to a point where the drag line and the plurality of slide bars cross each other according to the drag gesture 2605, and set a gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button as a gain value of a corresponding depth portion.

此外,当调整按钮的位置改变时,超声波设备1000也可以改变增益线2603的形状。例如,超声波设备1000可以随着拖动线改变增益线2603的形状。In addition, when the position of the adjustment button is changed, the ultrasonic device 1000 can also change the shape of the gain line 2603 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may change the shape of the gain line 2603 as the line is dragged.

超声波设备1000可以将与调整按钮的位置对应的增益值应用于超声回波信号。在这种情况下,可以改变超声波图像2600中的每个深度部分的亮度。The ultrasonic device 1000 may apply a gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button to the ultrasonic echo signal. In this case, the brightness of each depth portion in the ultrasound image 2600 may be changed.

图27是示出超声波设备1000确定输入模式的方法的流程图。FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a method of the ultrasonic device 1000 determining an input mode.

在操作S2710中,超声波设备1000可以感测指示物400在第二显示单元200上的触摸手势。In operation S2710, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense a touch gesture of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器识别指示物400触摸第二显示单元200。这里,触摸可以包括接触式触摸和非接触式触摸(悬停)。至少一个传感器可以是触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外线传感器中的至少一个,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may recognize that the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 via at least one sensor. Here, the touch may include contact touch and non-contact touch (hover). The at least one sensor may be at least one of a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor, but is not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器识别在第二显示单元200上的触摸手势的种类。触摸手势可以包括单手指手势,多手指手势,点击手势,触摸并保持手势,触摸并拖动手势,轻弹手势,滑动手势,悬停手势等,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may recognize a kind of a touch gesture on the second display unit 200 via at least one sensor. Touch gestures may include single-finger gestures, multi-finger gestures, tap gestures, touch-and-hold gestures, touch-and-drag gestures, flick gestures, slide gestures, hover gestures, etc., but are not limited thereto.

超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法在上面参照图5至8描述,因此省略其详细描述。The method of the ultrasonic device 1000 sensing the position of the pointer 400 is described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

在操作S2720中,超声波设备1000可以基于指示物400在第二显示单元200上感测的触摸手势的种类来确定输入模式。In operation S2720, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine an input mode based on the kind of the touch gesture sensed by the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,输入模式可以包括用于从超声波图像的深度部分中选择一个深度部分的深度选择模式和用于改变增益值的增益改变模式。According to an exemplary embodiment, the input mode may include a depth selection mode for selecting one depth portion from among depth portions of the ultrasound image and a gain change mode for changing a gain value.

例如,如果指示物400的触摸手势是单手指手势,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为深度选择模式,并且如果指示物400的触摸手势是多手指手势,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为增益改变模式。相反,如果指示物400的触摸手势是单手指手势,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为增益改变模式,并且如果指示物400的触摸手势是多手指手势,则超声波设备可以将输入模式确定为深度选择模式。For example, if the touch gesture of the pointer 400 is a single-finger gesture, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode as the depth selection mode, and if the touch gesture of the pointer 400 is a multi-finger gesture, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode as Change mode for gain. On the contrary, if the touch gesture of the pointer 400 is a single-finger gesture, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode as the gain change mode, and if the touch gesture of the pointer 400 is a multi-finger gesture, the ultrasonic device may determine the input mode as Depth selection mode.

除此之外,如果触摸手势是悬停手势,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为深度选择模式,并且如果触摸手势是触摸并拖动手势,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为增益改变模式。Besides, if the touch gesture is a hover gesture, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode as a depth selection mode, and if the touch gesture is a touch and drag gesture, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode as a gain change model.

在操作S2730和S2740中,当输入模式被确定为深度选择模式时,超声波设备1000可以根据触摸手势移动在增益线上标记的指示符。In operations S2730 and S2740, when the input mode is determined to be the depth selection mode, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the indicator marked on the gain line according to the touch gesture.

例如,当接收到用户与显示多个滑动条的增益设置窗口接触地在上下方向上拖动他/她的手指的第一拖动手势时,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为深度选择模式。这里,超声波设备1000可以从多个深度部分中选择特定深度部分,或者可以根据第一拖动手势来改变所选择的深度部分。超声波设备1000可以在表示由第一拖动手势选择的特定深度部分的位置上标记指示符。因此,如果用户在增益设定窗口内沿着上下方向拖动他/她的一个手指,则超声波设备1000可以根据第一拖动手势在显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线上沿着上下方向移动指示符。For example, when receiving a first drag gesture that the user drags his/her finger in an up and down direction in contact with a gain setting window displaying a plurality of slide bars, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode as the depth selection mode. Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may select a specific depth portion from among a plurality of depth portions, or may change the selected depth portion according to the first drag gesture. The ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator on a position representing a specific depth portion selected by the first drag gesture. Therefore, if the user drags his/her one finger in the up and down direction within the gain setting window, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move up and down on the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 according to the first drag gesture. Direction movement indicator.

在操作S2750和S2760中,当输入模式被确定为增益改变模式时,超声波设备1000可以根据触摸手势来调整深度部分的增益值。In operations S2750 and S2760, when the input mode is determined to be the gain change mode, the ultrasonic device 1000 may adjust the gain value of the depth portion according to the touch gesture.

例如,当接收到用户与显示多个滑动条的增益设置窗口接触地沿着左右方向拖动他/她的两个或多个手指的第二拖动手势时,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为增益改变模式。此外,超声波设备1000可以根据第二拖动手势来调整特定深度部分中的增益值。For example, when receiving a second drag gesture in which the user drags his/her two or more fingers in left and right directions in contact with a gain setting window displaying a plurality of slide bars, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine the input mode Change mode for gain. In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may adjust a gain value in a specific depth portion according to the second drag gesture.

在操作S2770中,当在增益改变模式中调整特定深度部分的增益值时,超声波设备1000可以根据调整的增益值来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线的形状。In operation S2770, when the gain value of the specific depth portion is adjusted in the gain change mode, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 according to the adjusted gain value.

以下,将参照图28A至29C描述超声波设备1000的用于根据触摸手势的种类来提供不同的输入模式的操作。图28A至29C示出了作为示例的单手指手势对应于深度选择模式并且多手指手势对应于增益改变模式的情况。Hereinafter, an operation of the ultrasonic device 1000 for providing different input modes according to kinds of touch gestures will be described with reference to FIGS. 28A to 29C . 28A to 29C illustrate a case where a single-finger gesture corresponds to a depth selection mode and a multi-finger gesture corresponds to a gain change mode as an example.

图28A和28B是示出根据示例性实施例的深度选择模式的图。28A and 28B are diagrams illustrating a depth selection mode according to an exemplary embodiment.

参考图28A,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像2800,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像2800相关的多个控制项目。Referring to FIG. 28A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image 2800 on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image 2800 on the second display unit 200 .

超声波设备1000可以接收通过使用指示物400来触摸第一区域预定时间段或更长时间的触摸并保持手势,第一区域上显示从多个控制项目中的增益控制项目2801。超声波设备1000可以根据关于第一区域的触摸并保持手势从多个控制项目中选择增益控制项目2801。这里,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示通过连接分别对应于包括在增益控制项目2801中的多个滑动条的增益值来形成的增益线2803。例如,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像2800旁边显示作为连接多个滑动条上的调整按钮的曲线的增益线2803。The ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a touch and hold gesture of touching a first area on which a gain control item 2801 from among a plurality of control items is displayed for a predetermined period of time or more by using the pointer 400 . The ultrasonic device 1000 may select a gain control item 2801 from a plurality of control items according to a touch-and-hold gesture with respect to the first area. Here, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display a gain line 2803 formed by connecting gain values respectively corresponding to a plurality of slider bars included in the gain control item 2801 on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a gain line 2803 as a curve connecting adjustment buttons on a plurality of slide bars next to the ultrasound image 2800 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以在增益线2803上标记表示指示物400在增益控制项目2801中的位置的指示符2804。例如,如果指示物400位于第四滑动条2802上,则超声波设备1000可以确定与第四滑动条2802对应的第四深度值,并且可以将指示符2804标记在增益线2803上表示第四深度值的位置。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator 2804 representing the position of the pointer 400 in the gain control item 2801 on the gain line 2803 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located on the fourth slider bar 2802, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine a fourth depth value corresponding to the fourth slider bar 2802, and may mark the indicator 2804 on the gain line 2803 to represent the fourth depth value s position.

在图28A中,作为示例,指示符2804具有圆形形状,但不限于此。也就是说,指示符2804可以具有各种形状。In FIG. 28A , the indicator 2804 has a circular shape as an example, but is not limited thereto. That is, the indicator 2804 may have various shapes.

当接收到用户在增益控制项目2810中在上下方向上拖动一个手指(例如,食指)的单手指手势2810时,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式确定为深度选择模式,并且可以根据单手指手势改变深度部分的选择。这里,单手指手势可能不影响增益值。When receiving a single-finger gesture 2810 in which the user drags a finger (for example, index finger) up and down in the gain control item 2810, the ultrasonic device 1000 can determine the input mode as the depth selection mode, and can change the input mode according to the single-finger gesture. Depth section selection. Here, a single-finger gesture may not affect the gain value.

参考图28B,超声波设备1000可以从深度部分中选择特定深度部分。Referring to FIG. 28B , the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may select a specific depth section from among the depth sections.

例如,如果指示物400根据向下拖动一个手指(例如,食指)的单手指手势2810从第四滑动条2802移动到第五滑动条上,则超声波设备1000可以选择对应于第五滑动条的第五深度部分,而不是对应于第四滑动条的第四深度部分。For example, if the pointer 400 moves from the fourth slide bar 2802 to the fifth slide bar according to the single-finger gesture 2810 of dragging one finger (for example, index finger) down, the ultrasound device 1000 may select the button corresponding to the fifth slide bar. The fifth depth section, instead of the fourth depth section corresponding to the fourth slider.

这里,超声波设备1000可以在增益线2603上将指示符2804从表示第四深度部分的第一点2806移动到表示第五深度部分的第二点2807。Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may move the indicator 2804 on the gain line 2603 from a first point 2806 representing the fourth depth portion to a second point 2807 representing the fifth depth portion.

因此,用户可以从增益线2803上的指示符2804来识别第二显示单元200上的指示物400当前接触的深度部分,而不将他/她的眼睛从第一显示单元100转动到第二显示单元200。此外,用户可以在第二显示单元200上向上或向下拖动他/她的一个手指,以便将指示符2804移动到希望调整其增益值的特定深度部分。Therefore, the user can recognize the depth portion currently touched by the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 from the indicator 2804 on the gain line 2803 without turning his/her eyes from the first display unit 100 to the second display unit 100. Unit 200. In addition, the user may drag his/her one finger up or down on the second display unit 200 to move the indicator 2804 to a specific depth portion whose gain value is desired to be adjusted.

图29A至29C是示出根据示例性实施例的增益改变模式的图。29A to 29C are diagrams illustrating gain changing modes according to an exemplary embodiment.

参考图29A,如果用户想要调整第五深度部分的增益值,则用户可以在增益控制项目2801内向上或向下拖动他/她的食指,并且可以在指示符2804位于表示第五深度部分的第二点2807处的状态下进一步将他/她的中指放在增益控制项目2801上。Referring to FIG. 29A , if the user wants to adjust the gain value of the fifth depth section, the user can drag his/her index finger up or down within the gain control item 2801, and can position the indicator 2804 to indicate the fifth depth section. The state at the second point 2807 further places his/her middle finger on the gain control item 2801.

在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以将上述手势感测为表示两个或多个手指的触摸的多手指手势2910,并且可以将输入模式从深度选择模式改变为增益改变模式。In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense the above gesture as the multi-finger gesture 2910 representing a touch of two or more fingers, and may change an input mode from a depth selection mode to a gain change mode.

参考图29B,超声波设备1000可以接收用户的手势2920,即与增益控制项目2801接触地将他/她的两个手指拖动到左侧或右侧。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用户将他/她的两个手指(食指和中指)拖动到右侧的输入。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以将第五深度部分的增益值从第一增益值增加到第二增益值,并且与第五深度部分对应的第五滑动条上的调整按钮可以移动到右侧。Referring to FIG. 29B , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive a user's gesture 2920 of dragging his/her two fingers to the left or right in contact with the gain control item 2801 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input that the user drags his/her two fingers (index and middle fingers) to the right. In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may increase the gain value of the fifth depth portion from the first gain value to the second gain value, and the adjustment button on the fifth slide bar corresponding to the fifth depth portion may be moved to the right side.

由于第五深度部分的增益值从第一增益值改变为第二增益值,所以超声波设备1000可以基于第二增益值来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线的形状。此外,超声波设备1000可以将第五深度部分的第二增益值施加到超声回波信号。因此,在第五深度部分的超声波图像可以变得更亮。Since the gain value of the fifth depth portion is changed from the first gain value to the second gain value, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the second gain value. In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may apply the second gain value of the fifth depth portion to the ultrasonic echo signal. Therefore, the ultrasonic image at the fifth depth portion can become brighter.

参考图29C,如果用户将他/她的中指从第二显示单元200取走以仅通过他/她的食指触摸第二显示单元200,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式从增益改变模式切换到深度选择模式。29C, if the user takes his/her middle finger away from the second display unit 200 to touch the second display unit 200 only with his/her index finger, the ultrasonic device 1000 can switch the input mode from the gain change mode to the depth Select a mode.

这里,用户可以向上或向下拖动他/她的食指,以选择其增益值被想要调整的特定深度部分。当指示符2804位于用户想要调整增益值的特定深度部分时,用户可以将他/她的中指再次放置在第二显示单元200上。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式从深度选择模式切换到增益改变模式。用户可以将他/她的两个手指移动到左或右侧以改变特定深度部分的增益值。Here, the user can drag his/her index finger up or down to select a specific depth portion whose gain value is desired to be adjusted. When the indicator 2804 is located at a specific depth portion where the user wants to adjust the gain value, the user may place his/her middle finger on the second display unit 200 again. In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may switch the input mode from the depth selection mode to the gain change mode. The user can move his/her two fingers to the left or right to change the gain value of a specific depth section.

因此,根据示例性实施例,用户可以通过重复使用单手指手势和多手指手势来改变特定深度部分的增益值而不观看第二显示单元200,并且改变的增益值可以通过第一显示单元100实时地识别。Therefore, according to an exemplary embodiment, a user can change the gain value of a specific depth portion without watching the second display unit 200 by repeatedly using a single-finger gesture and a multi-finger gesture, and the changed gain value can be displayed in real time through the first display unit 100. to identify.

图30是示出超声波设备1000基于触摸手势的种类确定与TGC相关的输入模式的示例的图。在图30中,将作为示例描述多手指手势对应于深度选择模式并且单手指手势对应于增益改变模式的情况。FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 determines an input mode related to TGC based on the kind of touch gesture. In FIG. 30 , a case where a multi-finger gesture corresponds to a depth selection mode and a single-finger gesture corresponds to a gain change mode will be described as an example.

参考图30的3010,超声波设备1000可以接收在用于调整TGC值的增益控制项目3000内在垂直于多个滑动条的方向上形成曲线的拖动手势。超声波设备1000可以根据拖动手势将调整按钮移动到拖动线和多个滑动条彼此交叉的位置,并且可以将与调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值设置为相应的深度部分的增益值。Referring to 3010 of FIG. 30 , the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may receive a drag gesture forming a curve in a direction perpendicular to a plurality of slide bars within the gain control item 3000 for adjusting a TGC value. The ultrasonic device 1000 may move the adjustment button to a position where the drag line and the plurality of slide bars cross each other according to the drag gesture, and may set a gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button as a gain value of a corresponding depth portion.

此外,超声波设备1000可以通过连接由调整值表示的增益值来生成增益线,并且可以在第一显示单元100上显示增益线。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示形成为拖动的曲线的增益线。Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may generate a gain line by connecting gain values represented by adjustment values, and may display the gain line on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display a gain line formed as a dragged curve on the first display unit 100 .

此外,超声波设备1000可以将与调整按钮的位置对应的增益值应用于超声回波信号。在这种情况下,超声波图像的关于深度部分的亮度可以被调整。In addition, the ultrasonic device 1000 may apply a gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button to the ultrasonic echo signal. In this case, the brightness of the portion of the ultrasound image with respect to the depth can be adjusted.

根据图30的3020,超声波设备1000可以通过使用用户的两个手指(例如食指和中指)接收触摸第二显示单元200上的增益控制项目3000的多手指手势。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式设定为深度选择模式。According to 3020 of FIG. 30 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a multi-finger gesture of touching the gain control item 3000 on the second display unit 200 by using two fingers (for example, the index finger and the middle finger) of the user. In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may set the input mode to the depth selection mode.

参考图30的3030,用户可以通过向上或向下拖动两个手指来选择用户想要调整增益值的特定深度部分。例如,如果用户将他/她的两个手指从第四滑动条拖动到第五滑动条上,则超声波设备1000可以选择第五深度部分而不是第四深度部分。Referring to 3030 of FIG. 30 , the user may select a specific depth portion where the user wants to adjust a gain value by dragging two fingers up or down. For example, if the user drags his/her two fingers from the fourth slide bar to the fifth slide bar, the ultrasonic device 1000 may select the fifth depth portion instead of the fourth depth portion.

这里,超声波设备1000可以在增益线上将指示符从表示第四深度部分的第一点移动到表示第五深度部分的第二点。Here, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may move the indicator on the gain line from a first point representing the fourth depth portion to a second point representing the fifth depth portion.

参考图30的3040,如果用户将他/她的中指从第二显示单元200取走并且仅通过食指触摸第二显示单元200,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式从深度选择模式切换到增益改变模式。Referring to 3040 of FIG. 30 , if the user takes his/her middle finger away from the second display unit 200 and only touches the second display unit 200 with the index finger, the ultrasonic device 1000 can switch the input mode from the depth selection mode to the gain change mode .

参考图30的3050,超声波设备1000可以接收用户与增益控制项目300接触地将他/她的食指在左右方向上拖动的手势。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用户将他/她的食指拖动到右侧的输入。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以基于拖动距离将第五深度部分的增益值从第一增益值增加到第二增益值,并且与第五深度部分对应的第五滑动条上的调整按钮可以移动到右侧。Referring to 3050 of FIG. 30 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a gesture in which the user drags his/her index finger in left and right directions while being in contact with the gain control item 300 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input that the user drags his/her index finger to the right. In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 can increase the gain value of the fifth depth part from the first gain value to the second gain value based on the dragging distance, and the adjustment button on the fifth slide bar corresponding to the fifth depth part Can be moved to the right.

由于第五深度部分的增益值从第一增益值改变为第二增益值,所以超声波设备1000可以基于第二增益值来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线的形状。超声波设备1000可以将第五深度部分的第二增益值施加到超声回波信号。因此,在第五深度部分的超声波图像可以比以前更亮。Since the gain value of the fifth depth portion is changed from the first gain value to the second gain value, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the second gain value. The ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may apply the second gain value of the fifth depth portion to the ultrasonic echo signal. Therefore, the ultrasonic image at the fifth depth portion can be brighter than before.

参考图30的3060,如果用户将他/她的中指再次放置在第二显示单元200并且通过食指和中指触摸第二显示单元200,则超声波设备1000可以将输入模式从增益改变模式切换到深度选择模式。Referring to 3060 of FIG. 30 , if the user places his/her middle finger on the second display unit 200 again and touches the second display unit 200 with the index and middle fingers, the ultrasonic device 1000 can switch the input mode from the gain change mode to the depth selection model.

这里,用户可以通过向上或向下拖动食指和中指来再次选择用户想要调整增益值的特定深度部分。当指示符位于要调整其增益值的深度部分时,用户将中指从第二显示单元200取走。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以再次将输入模式从深度选择模式切换到增益改变模式。用户可以通过在左右方向上拖动他/她的一个手指(食指)来改变所选择的深度部分的增益值。Here, the user can again select a specific depth portion where the user wants to adjust the gain value by dragging the index finger and the middle finger upward or downward. When the pointer is located at the depth portion whose gain value is to be adjusted, the user takes the middle finger away from the second display unit 200 . In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may switch the input mode from the depth selection mode to the gain change mode again. The user can change the gain value of the selected depth portion by dragging his/her one finger (index finger) in the left and right direction.

因此,根据示例性实施例,用户可以通过重复使用单手指手势和多手指手势来改变特定深度部分中的增益值而不看第二显示单元200,并且可以经由第一显示单元100实时地识别改变的增益值。Therefore, according to an exemplary embodiment, a user can change a gain value in a specific depth portion without looking at the second display unit 200 by repeatedly using a single-finger gesture and a multi-finger gesture, and can recognize the change in real time via the first display unit 100. gain value.

图31是示出超声波设备1000基于触摸手势的种类确定与LGC相关的输入模式的示例的图。在图31中,将作为示例描述单手指手势对应于扫描线选择模式并且多手指手势对应于增益改变模式的情况。FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ultrasonic device 1000 determines an input mode related to LGC based on the kind of touch gesture. In FIG. 31 , a case where a single-finger gesture corresponds to the scan line selection mode and a multi-finger gesture corresponds to the gain change mode will be described as an example.

参考图31的3110,超声波设备1000可以接收在用于调整LGC值的增益控制项目3100内在垂直于多个滑动条的方向上形成曲线的拖动手势。超声波设备1000可以根据拖动手势将调整按钮移动到拖动线和多个滑动条彼此交叉的位置,并且可以将与调整按钮的位置相对应的增益值设置为相应的扫描线部分的增益值。Referring to 3110 of FIG. 31 , the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may receive a drag gesture forming a curve in a direction perpendicular to a plurality of slide bars within the gain control item 3100 for adjusting the LGC value. The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may move the adjustment button to a position where the drag line and the plurality of slide bars intersect each other according to the drag gesture, and may set a gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button as a gain value of the corresponding scan line portion.

此外,超声波设备1000可以通过连接由调整按钮表示的增益值来生成增益线,并且可以在第一显示单元100上显示增益线。例如,超声波设备1000可以显示在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像下方形成为沿着横向方向的拖动线的增益线。Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may generate a gain line by connecting gain values represented by adjustment buttons, and may display the gain line on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a gain line formed as a drag line along a lateral direction under the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 .

超声波设备1000可以将与调整按钮的位置对应的增益值应用于超声回波信号。在这种情况下,超声波图像的扫描线部分的亮度可以被改变。The ultrasonic device 1000 may apply a gain value corresponding to the position of the adjustment button to the ultrasonic echo signal. In this case, the brightness of the scan line portion of the ultrasound image may be changed.

参考图31的3120,超声波设备1000可以通过使用用户的一个手指(例如食指)接收触摸第二显示单元200上的增益控制项目3100的单手指手势。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式设定为扫描线选择模式。Referring to 3120 of FIG. 31 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a single-finger gesture of touching the gain control item 3100 on the second display unit 200 by using one finger (for example, index finger) of the user. In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may set the input mode to the scan line selection mode.

参考图31的3130,用户可以通过在增益控制项目3100上拖动一个手指(食指)来选择特定扫描线部分。例如,如果用户将他/她的食指从第四滑动条拖动到第五滑动条上,则超声波设备1000可以选择第五扫描线部分而不是第四扫描线部分。Referring to 3130 of FIG. 31 , a user may select a specific scan line portion by dragging one finger (index finger) on the gain control item 3100 . For example, if the user drags his/her index finger from the fourth slide bar to the fifth slide bar, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may select the fifth scan line part instead of the fourth scan line part.

这里,超声波设备1000可以在增益线上将指示符从表示第四扫描线部分的第一点移动到表示第五扫描线部分的第二点。Here, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may move the indicator on the gain line from a first point representing a fourth scan line portion to a second point representing a fifth scan line portion.

参考图31的3140,如果用户将他/她的中指放在增益控制项目3100内,则超声波设备1000可以将其感测为多手指手势2910,并且可以将输入模式从扫描线选择模式改变为增益改变模式。Referring to 3140 of FIG. 31 , if the user puts his/her middle finger inside the gain control item 3100, the ultrasonic device 1000 may sense it as a multi-finger gesture 2910, and may change the input mode from scan line selection mode to gain Change mode.

参考图31的3150,超声波设备1000可以接收用户与增益控制项目3100接触地将他/她的两个手指(食指和中指)向上或向下拖动的手势。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用户的两个手指同时向上拖动的输入。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以基于拖动距离将第五扫描线部分的增益值从第一增益值改变到第二增益值,并且与第五深度部分对应的第五滑动条上的调整按钮可以向上移动。Referring to 3150 of FIG. 31 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a gesture in which the user drags his/her two fingers (index and middle fingers) up or down while being in contact with the gain control item 3100 . For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive an input that the user's two fingers are simultaneously dragged upwards. In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 can change the gain value of the fifth scan line part from the first gain value to the second gain value based on the dragging distance, and the adjustment on the fifth slide bar corresponding to the fifth depth part button to move up.

由于第五扫描线部分中的增益值从第一增益值改变为第二增益值,所以超声波设备1000可以基于第二增益值来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线的形状。超声波设备1000可以将第五扫描线部分中的第二增益值施加到超声回波信号。Since the gain value in the fifth scan line portion is changed from the first gain value to the second gain value, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the second gain value. The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may apply the second gain value in the fifth scan line portion to the ultrasound echo signal.

参考图31的3160,当用户将他/她的中指从增益控制项目3100取走并且仅通过食指触摸增益控制项目3100时,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式从增益改变模式切换到深度选择模式。Referring to 3160 of FIG. 31 , when the user takes his/her middle finger away from the gain control item 3100 and only touches the gain control item 3100 with the index finger, the ultrasonic device 1000 may switch the input mode from the gain change mode to the depth selection mode.

这里,用户可以通过在左右方向上拖动他/她的食指来选择想要调整其增益值的特定扫描线部分。当指示符位于用户想要调整增益值的特定扫描线部分时,用户可以将他/她的中指增益放在第二显示单元200上。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以将输入模式从扫描线选择模式再次切换到增益改变模式。用户可以通过向上或向下拖动两个手指(食指和中指)来改变特定扫描线部分的增益值。Here, the user can select a specific scan line portion whose gain value wants to be adjusted by dragging his/her index finger in the left and right directions. The user may place his/her middle finger gain on the second display unit 200 when the indicator is located at a specific scan line portion where the user wants to adjust the gain value. In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may switch the input mode from the scan line selection mode to the gain change mode again. The user can change the gain value for a particular scanline section by dragging two fingers (index and middle) up or down.

因此,根据示例性实施例,用户可以通过重复使用单手指手势和多手指手势来改变特定扫描线部分中的增益值(LGC值)而不看第二显示单元200,并且可以经由第一显示单元100实时地识别改变的增益值。Therefore, according to an exemplary embodiment, a user can change a gain value (LGC value) in a specific scan line portion without looking at the second display unit 200 by repeatedly using a single-finger gesture and a multi-finger gesture, and can 100 identifies changed gain values in real time.

图32是示出超声波设备1000提供与预设的增益值集合对应的增益线的方法的流程图;FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a method for the ultrasonic device 1000 to provide a gain line corresponding to a preset gain value set;

在操作S3210中,超声波设备1000可以经由第二显示单元200接收用于选择多个预设增益值集合中的一个的输入。多个预设增益值集合可以包括由超声波设备1000预先设定的增益值集合(例如,频繁使用的典型增益值集合)和由用户设置的预设增益值集合,但不限于此。In operation S3210, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive an input for selecting one of a plurality of preset gain value sets via the second display unit 200 . The plurality of preset gain value sets may include a gain value set preset by the ultrasonic device 1000 (for example, a frequently used typical gain value set) and a preset gain value set set by a user, but is not limited thereto.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以显示表示多个预设增益值集合的多个图标,并且可以接收用于选择多个图标中的一个的输入。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用于从多个图标中触摸指示第一增益值集合的第一图标的手势。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a plurality of icons representing a plurality of sets of preset gain values, and may receive an input for selecting one of the plurality of icons. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a gesture for touching a first icon indicating a first gain value set from among a plurality of icons.

指示预设增益值集合的图标可以包括通过连接对应于多个深度部分的增益值而获得的增益线。这里,增益线可以以实线,虚线,虚线和点线等进行各种表示。此外,表示增益值集合的图标可以表示为包括多个滑动条的图像。An icon indicating a preset gain value set may include a gain line obtained by connecting gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth sections. Here, the gain line can be variously expressed as a solid line, a dashed line, a dotted line, and a dotted line. Also, an icon representing a set of gain values may be represented as an image including a plurality of slide bars.

在操作S3220中,超声波设备1000可以根据所选择的增益值来移动多个滑动条上的至少一个调整按钮。In operation S3220, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may move at least one adjustment button on the plurality of slide bars according to the selected gain value.

预设增益值集合可以包括对应于多个深度部分的增益值。因此,超声波设备1000可以提取与包括在选择的预设增益值集合中的多个深度部分对应的增益值。此外,超声波设备1000可以基于提取的增益值来移动分别与多个深度部分匹配的多个滑动条上的调整按钮。The preset gain value set may include gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth sections. Accordingly, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may extract gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth portions included in the selected preset gain value set. In addition, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may move adjustment buttons on a plurality of slide bars respectively matched to a plurality of depth sections based on the extracted gain value.

在操作S3230中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示与所选择的预设增益值集合对应的增益线。例如,超声波设备1000可以通过连接包括在所选择的增益值集合中的增益值来生成增益线,并且可以在第一显示单元100上显示增益线。In operation S3230, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display a gain line corresponding to the selected set of preset gain values on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may generate a gain line by connecting gain values included in the selected gain value set, and may display the gain line on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将对应于包括在所选择的预设增益值集合中的多个深度部分的增益值施加到超声回波信号。这样,可以改变通过深度部分的在第一显示设备100上的超声波图像的亮度。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may apply gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth portions included in the selected preset gain value set to the ultrasonic echo signal. In this way, the brightness of the ultrasonic image on the first display device 100 passing through the depth portion can be changed.

图33A至33C是示出提供关于由用户设置和选择的预设增益值的信息的示例的图。33A to 33C are diagrams illustrating examples of providing information on preset gain values set and selected by a user.

参考图33A,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像3300,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像3300相关的多个控制项目。超声波设备1000可以接收通过指示物400来触摸从多个控制项目中的预设项目3301预定时间段或更长时间的手势3302。Referring to FIG. 33A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image 3300 on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image 3300 on the second display unit 200 . The ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a gesture 3302 of touching a preset item 3301 from among a plurality of control items for a predetermined period of time or more through the pointer 400 .

参考图33B,响应于触摸预设按钮3301的手势3302,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示多个预设增益值集合的列表3303。列表3303可以包括分别对应于多个增益值集合的图标。Referring to FIG. 33B , in response to a gesture 3302 of touching a preset button 3301 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a list 3303 of a plurality of preset gain value sets on the second display unit 200 . List 3303 may include icons respectively corresponding to a plurality of gain value sets.

当接收到指示物400在列表3303内侧触摸时,超声波设备1000也可以在第一显示单元100上显示包括多个增益值集合的列表3305。此外,超声波设备1000可以在显示在第一显示单元100上的列表3305中标记表示指示物400的当前位置的指示符。例如,如果指示物400位于第二显示单元200上的第二增益值集合3304上,则超声波设备1000可以在显示在第一显示单元200上的列表3305中的第二增益值集合3304上标记星形形状的指示符3306。When receiving the touch of the pointer 400 inside the list 3303 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may also display a list 3305 including a plurality of gain value sets on the first display unit 100 . Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may mark an indicator representing the current location of the pointer 400 in the list 3305 displayed on the first display unit 100 . For example, if the pointer 400 is located on the second set of gain values 3304 on the second display unit 200, the ultrasound device 1000 may mark a star on the second set of gain values 3304 in the list 3305 displayed on the first display unit 200. An indicator 3306 of a shape.

如果用户与第二显示单元200接触地拖动指示物400,则超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的移动来移动指示符3306。例如,如果用户将指示物400从第一增益值集合拖动到第二增益值集合3304(2010),则超声波设备1000可以将第二显示单元200上标记的指示符3306从第一增益值集合移动到第二增益值集合3304。If the user drags the pointer 400 in contact with the second display unit 200 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the pointer 3306 according to the movement of the pointer 400 . For example, if the user drags the pointer 400 from the first set of gain values to the second set of gain values 3304 (2010), the ultrasound device 1000 can drag the indicator 3306 marked on the second display unit 200 from the first set of gain values Move to the second set of gain values 3304 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以接收用于在第二显示单元200上显示的列表3303中选择一个增益值的输入。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用于触摸第二增益值集合3304的输入。这里,触摸第二增益值集合3304的压力等于或大于临界值,超声波设备1000可以确定用户选择列表3303中的第二增益值集合3304。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以从存储介质(例如,存储器,外部存储介质或云服务器)读取与包括在所选择的第二增益值集合3304中的多个深度部分对应的增益值。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive an input for selecting one gain value in the list 3303 displayed on the second display unit 200 . For example, ultrasound device 1000 may receive input for touching second set of gain values 3304 . Here, the pressure of touching the second gain value set 3304 is equal to or greater than a critical value, and the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine that the user selects the second gain value set 3304 in the list 3303 . In this case, the ultrasonic device 1000 may read gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth sections included in the selected second gain value set 3304 from a storage medium (eg, a memory, an external storage medium, or a cloud server).

参考图33C,超声波设备1000可以根据与包括在所选择的第二增益值集合3304中的多个深度部分对应的增益值,在包括在增益控制项目3307中的多个滑动条上移动调整按钮。Referring to FIG. 33C , the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may move adjustment buttons on a plurality of slide bars included in the gain control item 3307 according to gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth sections included in the selected second gain value set 3304 .

超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示与所选择的第二增益值集合对应的增益线3308。例如,超声波设备1000可以通过连接包括在第二增益值集合中的增益值来生成增益线3308,并且可以在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像3300旁边显示增益线3308。The ultrasound device 1000 may display a gain line 3308 corresponding to the selected second gain value set on the first display unit 100 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may generate a gain line 3308 by connecting gain values included in the second gain value set, and may display the gain line 3308 next to the ultrasound image 3300 displayed on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以标记指示符3309,其指示指示物400在增益线3308上的增益控制项目3307中的位置。例如,如果指示物400位于第七滑动条上,则超声波设备1000可以确定与第七滑动条相对应的第七深度值,并且在增益线3308的表示第七深度值的位置处标记指示符3309。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may mark an indicator 3309 indicating a position of the indicator 400 in the gain control item 3307 on the gain line 3308 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located on the seventh slider bar, the ultrasound device 1000 may determine the seventh depth value corresponding to the seventh slider bar and mark the indicator 3309 at the position representing the seventh depth value on the gain line 3308 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将对应于包括在第二增益值集合中的多个深度部分的增益值施加到超声回波信号。在这种情况下,超声波图像的通过深度部分的亮度可以被改变。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may apply gain values corresponding to a plurality of depth portions included in the second gain value set to the ultrasonic echo signal. In this case, the brightness of the through-depth portion of the ultrasonic image may be changed.

图34是示出超声波设备1000在多个显示单元上显示增益线的方法的流程图。FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a method of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 displaying gain lines on a plurality of display units.

在操作S3410中,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像。In operation S3410, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以将经由探头20获得的实时超声波图像显示在第一显示单元100上。此外,根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示预先存储在存储介质中的超声波图像。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display a real-time ultrasound image obtained via the probe 20 on the first display unit 100 . In addition, according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display an ultrasonic image pre-stored in a storage medium on the first display unit 100 .

此外,超声波图像可以是B模式图像,C模式图像,D模式图像,M模式图像和弹性模式图像中的至少一种,但不限于此。根据示例性实施例的超声波图像可以是2D图像,3D图像或4D图像。In addition, the ultrasound image may be at least one of B-mode image, C-mode image, D-mode image, M-mode image, and elasticity-mode image, but is not limited thereto. An ultrasound image according to an exemplary embodiment may be a 2D image, a 3D image or a 4D image.

在操作S3420中,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示用于设置与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值的第一增益线。根据示例性实施例,第一增益线可以是显示在第二显示单元200上的控制项目中的一个。In operation S3420, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display on the second display unit 200 a first gain line for setting a gain value corresponding to a depth portion of the ultrasound image. According to an exemplary embodiment, the first gain line may be one of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 .

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示第一增益线以及显示在第一显示单元100上的超声波图像。例如,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第二显示单元200的第二区域上显示第一增益线。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the first gain line and the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 on the second display unit 200 . For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image on a first area of the second display unit 200 and may display a first gain line on a second area of the second display unit 200 .

在操作S3430中,超声波设备1000可以基于用于触摸第一增益线的触摸输入,在第一显示单元100上显示与第一增益线对应的第二增益线。In operation S3430, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may display a second gain line corresponding to the first gain line on the first display unit 100 based on a touch input for touching the first gain line.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以经由至少一个传感器识别触摸在第二显示单元200上的第一增益线的指示物400。触摸可以包括接触式触摸和非接触式触摸(悬停)。至少一个传感器可以是触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器,深度传感器和红外线传感器中的至少一个,但不限于此。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may recognize the pointer 400 touching the first gain line on the second display unit 200 via at least one sensor. Touch can include contact touch and non-contact touch (hover). The at least one sensor may be at least one of a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor, a depth sensor, and an infrared sensor, but is not limited thereto.

超声波设备1000感测指示物400的位置的方法在上面参照图5至8描述,因此省略其详细描述。The method of the ultrasonic device 1000 sensing the position of the pointer 400 is described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8 , and thus a detailed description thereof is omitted.

根据示例性实施例,显示在第二显示单元200上的第一增益线和显示在第一显示单元100上的第二增益线可以是通过连接对应于超声波图像的深度部分的增益值而形成的线。例如,超声波设备1000可以响应于用于触摸第一增益线的触摸输入,提取分别由第一增益线上的点表示的多个增益值,并且可以通过使用提取的多个增益值来生成第二增益线。According to an exemplary embodiment, the first gain line displayed on the second display unit 200 and the second gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 may be formed by connecting gain values corresponding to a depth portion of an ultrasound image. Wire. For example, the ultrasonic device 1000 may extract a plurality of gain values respectively represented by points on the first gain line in response to a touch input for touching the first gain line, and may generate a second gain value by using the extracted plurality of gain values. gain line.

因此,第一增益线和第二增益线可以彼此相似。然而,根据第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200的屏幕尺寸之间的比率,第一增益线的长度和第二增益线的长度可以彼此不同。例如,如果第一显示单元100比第二显示单元200大两倍,则第一增益线的长度可以比第二增益线的长度长两倍。Therefore, the first gain line and the second gain line may be similar to each other. However, the length of the first gain line and the length of the second gain line may be different from each other according to the ratio between the screen sizes of the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 . For example, if the first display unit 100 is twice larger than the second display unit 200, the length of the first gain line may be twice as long as that of the second gain line.

考虑到在第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200上显示的超声波图像的尺寸之间的比率,超声波设备1000可以确定第一增益线和第二增益线的长度。例如,如果在第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200上显示的超声波图像的尺寸之间的比率为3:2,则可以确定第二增益线的长度,使得第一增益线和第二增益线的长度之间的比率为3:2。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine the lengths of the first gain line and the second gain line in consideration of the ratio between the sizes of the ultrasound images displayed on the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 . For example, if the ratio between the sizes of the ultrasonic images displayed on the first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 is 3:2, the length of the second gain line can be determined such that the first gain line and the second gain The ratio between the lengths of the lines is 3:2.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以考虑第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像的整个深度值或纵向长度来确定第二增益线的尺寸。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may determine the size of the second gain line in consideration of the entire depth value or longitudinal length of the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 .

根据示例性实施例,如果指示物400触摸第一增益线,则超声波设备1000可以与超声波图像一起在第一显示单元100上显示与第一显示线对应的第二增益线。例如,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像上或超声波图像旁边显示第二增益线。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the pointer 400 touches the first gain line, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the second gain line corresponding to the first display line on the first display unit 100 together with the ultrasound image. For example, the ultrasound device 1000 may display the second gain line on or beside the ultrasound image.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以与超声波图像的深度轴线一起显示第二增益线。例如,超声波设备1000可以在超声波图像的一侧显示第二增益线,使得由第二增益线上的点表示的深度值可以与超声波图像中的深度值匹配。这里,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示第二增益线,使得第二增益线的最上点与超声波图像的最低深度值匹配,并且第二增益线的最下点与超声波图像的最高深度值匹配。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the second gain line together with the depth axis of the ultrasound image. For example, the ultrasound device 1000 may display a second gain line on one side of the ultrasound image, so that a depth value represented by a point on the second gain line may match a depth value in the ultrasound image. Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the second gain line on the first display unit 100 such that the uppermost point of the second gain line matches the lowest depth value of the ultrasonic image, and the lowermost point of the second gain line matches the highest depth value of the ultrasonic image. The depth value matches.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以在第二增益线上标记表示由指示物400触摸的第一增益线上的点的指示符。例如,如果指示物400位于第一增益线上的第一深度值,则超声波设备1000可以第二增益线上将指示符标记在表示第一深度值的位置。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic apparatus 1000 may mark an indicator representing a point on the first gain line touched by the pointer 400 on the second gain line. For example, if the indicator 400 is located at the first depth value on the first gain line, the ultrasound device 1000 may mark the indicator at the position representing the first depth value on the second gain line.

根据示例性实施例,如果指示物400在第一增益线上的位置改变,则超声波设备1000可以根据指示物400的改变的位置来移动标记在第二增益线上的指示符。例如,如果指示物400与第一增益线一起向下移动,则超声波设备1000也可以随着第二增益线向下移动指示符。如果指示物400在第一增益线上的触摸位置被改变到新的位置,则超声波设备1000可以确定第二增益线上对应于新位置的点,并且可以将指示符移动到新位置。According to an exemplary embodiment, if the position of the pointer 400 on the first gain line is changed, the ultrasonic device 1000 may move the indicator marked on the second gain line according to the changed position of the pointer 400 . For example, if the indicator 400 moves down with the first gain line, the ultrasound device 1000 may also move the indicator down with the second gain line. If the touch position of the pointer 400 on the first gain line is changed to a new position, the ultrasonic device 1000 may determine a point corresponding to the new position on the second gain line, and may move the pointer to the new position.

根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以接收用于经由第一增益线将对应于第一增益线的第一增益值集合改变为第二增益值集合的输入。在这种情况下,超声波设备1000可以基于第二增益值集合来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的第二增益线的形状。例如,如果第一增益线从直线变为S曲线,则超声波设备1000可以将第二增益线从直线改变为S曲线。According to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive an input for changing a first set of gain values corresponding to the first gain line to a second set of gain values via the first gain line. In this case, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the shape of the second gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the second set of gain values. For example, if the first gain line changes from a straight line to an S-curve, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the second gain line from a straight line to an S-curve.

根据示例性实施例,当触摸第一增益线的触摸输入结束时,超声波设备1000可以停止显示第二增益线。例如,如果用户将他/她的接触第一增益线的手指从第二显示单元200取走,则超声波设备1000可能不再在第一显示单元100上显示第二增益线。According to an exemplary embodiment, when the touch input of touching the first gain line ends, the ultrasonic device 1000 may stop displaying the second gain line. For example, if the user removes his/her finger touching the first gain line from the second display unit 200 , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may no longer display the second gain line on the first display unit 100 .

在下文中,将参照图35A至35F来描述超声波设备1000的用于通过多个显示单元提供多个增益线的操作。Hereinafter, an operation of the ultrasound apparatus 1000 for providing a plurality of gain lines through a plurality of display units will be described with reference to FIGS. 35A to 35F .

图35A至35F是示出超声波设备1000在触摸屏和主屏幕上显示增益线的示例的图。35A to 35F are diagrams illustrating examples in which the ultrasonic device 1000 displays gain lines on a touch screen and a home screen.

参考图35A,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示超声波图像3500,并且可以在第二显示单元200上显示与超声波图像3500相关的多个控制项目。这里,可以在第一页面3510和第二页面3520上分别显示多个控制项目。Referring to FIG. 35A , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display an ultrasound image 3500 on the first display unit 100 and may display a plurality of control items related to the ultrasound image 3500 on the second display unit 200 . Here, a plurality of control items may be displayed on the first page 3510 and the second page 3520, respectively.

超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示包括颜色反转项目,M线项目,双实时项目,ADVR项目和阿尔法混合项目的第一页面3510。这里,超声波设备1000可以接收用户将第一页面3510滑动到与第二显示单元200接触的左侧的页面改变手势3501。The ultrasonic device 1000 may display a first page 3510 including a color inversion item, an M-line item, a dual real-time item, an ADVR item, and an alpha blending item on the second display unit 200 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a page change gesture 3501 in which the user slides the first page 3510 to the left side in contact with the second display unit 200 .

参考图35B,响应于页面改变手势3501,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示第二页面3520,而不是第一页面3510。显示在第二显示单元200上的第二页面3520可以包括超声波图像3500和第一增益线3502。第一增益线3502可以是用于根据深度部分调整TGC值的用户界面。Referring to FIG. 35B , in response to a page change gesture 3501 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a second page 3520 instead of the first page 3510 on the second display unit 200 . The second page 3520 displayed on the second display unit 200 may include an ultrasound image 3500 and a first gain line 3502 . The first gain line 3502 may be a user interface for adjusting the TGC value according to the depth section.

参考图35C,超声波设备1000可以接收触摸包括在第二页面3520中的第一增益线3502的手势。这里,超声波设备1000可以在第一显示单元100上显示与第一增益线3502对应的第二增益线3504。这里,超声波设备1000可以与在第一显示单元100上显示的超声波图像3500的深度轴线一起显示第二增益线3504。Referring to FIG. 35C , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive a gesture of touching the first gain line 3502 included in the second page 3520 . Here, the ultrasonic device 1000 may display the second gain line 3504 corresponding to the first gain line 3502 on the first display unit 100 . Here, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may display the second gain line 3504 together with the depth axis of the ultrasound image 3500 displayed on the first display unit 100 .

参考图35D,超声波设备1000可以接收用于通过使用第一增益线3502将对应于第一增益线3502的第一增益值集合改变为第二增益值集合的输入。例如,超声波设备1000可以接收用于将曲线形状的第一增益线3502改变成直线的触摸并拖动输入3506。在这种情况下,与曲线形状的第一增益线3502对应的第一增益值集合可以改变成与直线对应的第二增益值集合。Referring to FIG. 35D , the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may receive an input for changing a first set of gain values corresponding to the first gain line 3502 to a second set of gain values by using the first gain line 3502 . For example, the ultrasound device 1000 may receive a touch-and-drag input 3506 for changing the curved first gain line 3502 into a straight line. In this case, the first set of gain values corresponding to the curved first gain line 3502 may be changed to the second set of gain values corresponding to a straight line.

超声波设备1000可以基于设定的第二增益值集合来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的第二增益线3504的形状。例如,由于第一增益线3502从曲线型改变为直线型,所以超声波设备1000可以将第二增益线3504从曲线型改变为直线型。The ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the shape of the second gain line 3504 displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the set second gain value set. For example, since the first gain line 3502 is changed from a curved shape to a straight shape, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may change the second gain line 3504 from a curved shape to a straight shape.

超声波设备1000可以标记指示符3505,其在第二增益线3504上指示指示物400在第一增益线3502上的位置。例如,如果指示物400位于第一增益线3502上的第十深度值,则超声波设备1000可以在第二增益线上将指示符3505标记在表示第十深度值的位置。The ultrasound device 1000 may mark an indicator 3505 that indicates on the second gain line 3504 the position of the indicator 400 on the first gain line 3502 . For example, if the indicator 400 is located at the tenth depth value on the first gain line 3502, the ultrasound device 1000 may mark the indicator 3505 at the position representing the tenth depth value on the second gain line.

参考图35E,超声波设备1000可以接收用户将第二页面3520滑动到与第二页面3520中没有显示第一增益线3502的点接触的右侧的页面改变手势3507。Referring to FIG. 35E , the ultrasonic device 1000 may receive a page change gesture 3507 in which the user slides the second page 3520 to the right side in contact with a point in the second page 3520 where the first gain line 3502 is not displayed.

这里,由于指示物400不再触摸第一增益线3502,所以超声波设备1000可能不再在第一显示单元100上显示第二增益线3504(3508)。Here, since the pointer 400 no longer touches the first gain line 3502, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may no longer display the second gain line 3504 on the first display unit 100 (3508).

参考图35F,响应于页面改变手势3507,超声波设备1000可以在第二显示单元200上显示第一页面3510,而不是第二页面3520。Referring to FIG. 35F , in response to a page change gesture 3507 , the ultrasonic device 1000 may display a first page 3510 instead of a second page 3520 on the second display unit 200 .

图36和37是根据示例性实施例的超声波设备1000的框图。36 and 37 are block diagrams of an ultrasonic device 1000 according to an exemplary embodiment.

如图36,根据示例性实施例的超声波设备1000可以包括第一显示单元100,第二显示单元200和控制器1700。第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200可以通过无线或有线连接与控制器1700通信。然而,并非图中所示的所有组件都是必需元件。超声波设备1000可以包括比图36的那些更多或更少的组件。As shown in FIG. 36 , an ultrasonic device 1000 according to an exemplary embodiment may include a first display unit 100 , a second display unit 200 and a controller 1700 . The first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 may communicate with the controller 1700 through a wireless or wired connection. However, not all components shown in the figures are required elements. Ultrasound device 1000 may include more or fewer components than those of FIG. 36 .

例如,如图37所示,超声波诊断设备1000可以包括探头20,超声波收发器1100,图像处理器1200,通信模块1300,显示器1400,存储器1500,输入装置1600和控制器1700,传感器1900,其可以通过总线1800彼此连接。For example, as shown in Figure 37, the ultrasonic diagnostic equipment 1000 may include a probe 20, an ultrasonic transceiver 1100, an image processor 1200, a communication module 1300, a display 1400, a memory 1500, an input device 1600 and a controller 1700, and a sensor 1900, which may They are connected to each other through a bus 1800 .

超声波设备1000可以是手推式设备或便携式设备。便携式超声波设备的示例可以包括但不限于图像归档和通信系统(PACS)查看器,智能电话,膝上型计算机,个人数字助理(PDA)和平板PC。The ultrasound device 1000 may be a hand-held device or a portable device. Examples of portable ultrasound devices may include, but are not limited to, picture archiving and communication system (PACS) viewers, smartphones, laptop computers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and tablet PCs.

探头20响应于由超声波收发器1100施加的驱动信号而将超声波发送到对象10,并且接收由对象10反射的回波信号。探头20包括多个换能器,并且多个换能器响应于电信号振荡并产生声能,即超声波。此外,探头20可以通过有线或无线连接到超声波设备1000的主体,并且根据示例性实施例,超声波设备1000可以包括多个探头20。The probe 20 transmits ultrasonic waves to the subject 10 in response to a driving signal applied by the ultrasonic transceiver 1100 and receives echo signals reflected by the subject 10 . The probe 20 includes a plurality of transducers, and the plurality of transducers oscillates and generates acoustic energy, ie, ultrasonic waves, in response to electrical signals. In addition, the probe 20 may be connected to the body of the ultrasonic device 1000 by wire or wirelessly, and according to an exemplary embodiment, the ultrasonic device 1000 may include a plurality of probes 20 .

发射机1110将驱动信号提供给探头20。发射机110包括脉冲发生器1112,传输延迟单元1114和脉冲器1116。脉冲发生器1112基于预定的脉冲重复频率(PRF)产生用于形成发送超声波的脉冲,并且发送延迟单元1114将脉冲延迟确定发送方向性所需的延迟时间。已经被延迟的脉冲分别对应于包括在探头20中的多个压电振动器。脉冲器1116基于对应于已被延迟的每个脉冲的定时向探头20施加驱动信号(或驱动脉冲)。Transmitter 1110 provides a drive signal to probe 20 . Transmitter 110 includes pulse generator 1112 , transmission delay unit 1114 and pulser 1116 . The pulse generator 1112 generates pulses for forming transmission ultrasonic waves based on a predetermined pulse repetition frequency (PRF), and the transmission delay unit 1114 delays the pulses by a delay time required to determine transmission directivity. The pulses that have been delayed correspond to the plurality of piezoelectric vibrators included in the probe 20, respectively. The pulser 1116 applies a drive signal (or drive pulse) to the probe 20 based on the timing corresponding to each pulse that has been delayed.

接收器1120通过处理从探头20接收的回波信号来产生超声波数据。接收器120可以包括放大器1122,模数转换器(ADC)1124,接收延迟单元1126和求和单元1128。放大器1122放大每个通道中的回波信号,并且ADC1124对放大的回波信号执行模数转换。接收延迟单元1126将由ADC 1124输出的数字回波信号延迟确定接收方向性所需的延迟时间,并且求和单元1128通过对由接收延迟单元1126处理的回波信号求和来生成超声波数据。在一些示例性实施例中,接收器1120可以不包括放大器1122。换句话说,如果增强了探头20的灵敏度或ADC 1124处理位的能力,则可以省略放大器1122。The receiver 1120 generates ultrasonic data by processing echo signals received from the probe 20 . Receiver 120 may include amplifier 1122 , analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 1124 , receive delay unit 1126 and summation unit 1128 . The amplifier 1122 amplifies the echo signal in each channel, and the ADC 1124 performs analog-to-digital conversion on the amplified echo signal. The reception delay unit 1126 delays the digital echo signal output by the ADC 1124 for a delay time required to determine reception directivity, and the summation unit 1128 generates ultrasonic data by summing the echo signals processed by the reception delay unit 1126 . In some exemplary embodiments, receiver 1120 may not include amplifier 1122 . In other words, amplifier 1122 may be omitted if the sensitivity of probe 20 or the ability of ADC 1124 to process bits is enhanced.

图像处理器1200通过扫描转换由超声波收发器1100生成的超声波数据并通过数据处理器1210处理超声波数据来生成超声波图像。超声波图像不仅可以是通过以幅度(A)模式,亮度(B)模式和运动(M)模式扫描对象而获得的灰度超声波图像,而且可以是通过多普勒效应示出对象的移动的多普勒图像。多普勒图像可以是示出血液流动的血流多普勒图像(也称为彩色多普勒图像),表示组织移动的组织多普勒图像,或者表示作为波形的对象的移动速度的频谱多普勒图像。The image processor 1200 generates an ultrasound image by scan-converting ultrasound data generated by the ultrasound transceiver 1100 and processing the ultrasound data by the data processor 1210 . Ultrasound images can be not only gray-scale ultrasound images obtained by scanning the subject in amplitude (A) mode, brightness (B) mode, and motion (M) mode, but also Doppler showing the movement of the subject through the Doppler effect Le image. The Doppler image can be a blood flow Doppler image (also called a color Doppler image) showing blood flow, a tissue Doppler image showing tissue movement, or a spectrum multicolor image showing the moving speed of an object as a waveform. Puller image.

B模式处理器1212从超声波数据中提取B模式分量并处理B模式分量。图像生成器1220可以基于提取的B模式分量1212生成将信号强度指示为亮度的超声波图像。The B-mode processor 1212 extracts B-mode components from the ultrasound data and processes the B-mode components. The image generator 1220 may generate an ultrasound image indicating signal strength as brightness based on the extracted B-mode component 1212 .

类似地,多普勒处理器1214可以从超声波数据提取多普勒分量,并且图像生成器1220可以基于所提取的多普勒分量来生成将对象的移动指示作为颜色或波形的多普勒图像。Similarly, the Doppler processor 1214 may extract Doppler components from the ultrasound data, and the image generator 1220 may generate a Doppler image indicative of the movement of the object as a color or waveform based on the extracted Doppler components.

根据示例性实施例,图像生成器1220可以通过相对于体积数据的体绘制来生成三维(3D)超声波图像,并且还可以通过由于压力成像对象10的变形来生成弹性图像。此外,图像生成器1220可以通过使用文本和图形在超声波图像中显示各种附加信息。此外,所生成的超声波图像可以存储在存储器1500中。According to an exemplary embodiment, the image generator 1220 may generate a three-dimensional (3D) ultrasonic image through volume rendering with respect to volume data, and may also generate an elasticity image by imaging deformation of the object 10 due to pressure. Also, the image generator 1220 can display various additional information in the ultrasound image by using text and graphics. Also, the generated ultrasound images may be stored in the memory 1500 .

显示器1400显示所生成的超声波图像。显示器1400可以不仅显示超声波图像,还可以经由图形用户界面(GUI)在屏幕图像上显示由超声波设备1000处理的各种信息。此外,超声波设备1000可以包括根据示例性实施例的两个或更多个显示器1400。例如,超声波设备1000可以包括第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200。这里,第一显示单元100可以是显示超声波图像的主屏幕。第二显示单元200可以是用于显示多个控制项目的控制屏幕。上面参考图1描述第一显示单元100和第二显示单元200,因此省略其详细描述。The display 1400 displays the generated ultrasonic images. The display 1400 may not only display an ultrasound image, but may also display various information processed by the ultrasound apparatus 1000 on a screen image via a Graphical User Interface (GUI). Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may include two or more displays 1400 according to an exemplary embodiment. For example, the ultrasound apparatus 1000 may include a first display unit 100 and a second display unit 200 . Here, the first display unit 100 may be a main screen displaying ultrasound images. The second display unit 200 may be a control screen for displaying a plurality of control items. The first display unit 100 and the second display unit 200 are described above with reference to FIG. 1 , and thus detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

通信模块1300通过有线或无线连接到网络30以与外部装置或服务器32进行通信。例如,通信模块1300通过有线或无线地连接到网络30以与医学设备34或便携式终端36交换数据。The communication module 1300 is connected to the network 30 by wire or wirelessly to communicate with an external device or server 32 . For example, the communication module 1300 is connected to the network 30 by wire or wirelessly to exchange data with the medical device 34 or the portable terminal 36 .

通信模块1300可以与医院服务器或医院中的另一医疗设备交换数据,该医疗设备经由PACS与其连接。此外,通信模块1300可以根据医学数字成像和通信(DICOM)标准执行数据通信。The communication module 1300 may exchange data with a hospital server or another medical device in the hospital, which is connected thereto via the PACS. Also, the communication module 1300 may perform data communication according to the Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM) standard.

通信模块1300可以经由网络30发送或接收与对象10的诊断有关的数据,例如对象10的超声波图像,超声波数据和多普勒数据,并且还可以发送或接收由另一医疗设备(例如计算机断层摄影(CT)设备,磁共振成像(MRI)设备或X射线设备)捕获的医学图像。此外,通信模块1300可以从服务器32接收关于患者的诊断历史或医疗处理时间表的信息,并利用所接收的信息来诊断患者。此外,通信模块1300可以不仅与医院中的服务器或医疗设备进行数据通信,而且还可以与医生或病人的便携式终端进行数据通信。The communication module 1300 can transmit or receive data related to the diagnosis of the subject 10, such as an ultrasound image of the subject 10, ultrasound data, and Doppler data, via the network 30, and can also transmit or receive data generated by another medical device such as computer tomography. (CT) equipment, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) equipment, or X-ray equipment). In addition, the communication module 1300 may receive information on the patient's diagnosis history or medical treatment schedule from the server 32 and diagnose the patient using the received information. In addition, the communication module 1300 may perform data communication not only with a server or a medical device in a hospital, but also with a doctor or a patient's portable terminal.

通信模块1300可以包括用于与外部设备通信的一个或多个组件。例如,通信模块1300可以包括局域通信模块1310,有线通信模块1320和移动通信模块1330。The communication module 1300 may include one or more components for communicating with external devices. For example, the communication module 1300 may include a local area communication module 1310 , a wired communication module 1320 and a mobile communication module 1330 .

局域通信模块1310参考用于在预定距离内进行局域通信的模块。根据示例性实施例的局域通信技术的示例可以包括但不限于无线LAN,Wi-Fi,蓝牙,ZigBee,Wi-Fi直连(WFD),超宽带(UWB),红外数据协会(IrDA),蓝牙低能量(BLE)和近场通信(NFC)。The local area communication module 1310 refers to a module for local area communication within a predetermined distance. Examples of local area communication technologies according to exemplary embodiments may include, but are not limited to, Wireless LAN, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, ZigBee, Wi-Fi Direct (WFD), Ultra Wideband (UWB), Infrared Data Association (IrDA), Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) and Near Field Communication (NFC).

有线通信模块1320是指使用电信号或光信号进行通信的模块。根据示例性实施例的有线通信技术的示例可以包括经由双绞线电缆,同轴电缆,光纤电缆和以太网电缆的通信。The wired communication module 1320 refers to a module that communicates using electrical or optical signals. Examples of wired communication techniques according to an exemplary embodiment may include communication via twisted pair cables, coaxial cables, fiber optic cables, and Ethernet cables.

移动通信模块1330向或从移动通信网络上的基站,外部终端和服务器中选择的至少一个发送或接收无线信号。无线信号可以是语音呼叫信号,视频呼叫信号或用于文本/多媒体消息的发送和接收的各种类型的数据。The mobile communication module 1330 transmits or receives a wireless signal to or from at least one selected from among a base station, an external terminal and a server on a mobile communication network. The wireless signal may be a voice call signal, a video call signal, or various types of data for text/multimedia message transmission and reception.

存储器1500存储由超声波设备1000处理的各种数据。例如,存储器1500可以存储与对象的诊断相关的医学数据,例如超声波数据和输入或输出的超声波图像,并且还可以存储要在超声波设备1000中执行的算法或程序。存储器1500可以存储用于调整与超声波图像有关的参数的多个控制项目,关于分别连接到多个控制项目的用户界面的信息,关于预设增益值的信息(例如,预设TGC或预设LGC),关于与特定功能匹配的手势的信息等。The memory 1500 stores various data processed by the ultrasonic device 1000 . For example, the memory 1500 may store medical data related to the diagnosis of a subject, such as ultrasound data and input or output ultrasound images, and may also store algorithms or programs to be executed in the ultrasound apparatus 1000 . The memory 1500 may store a plurality of control items for adjusting parameters related to ultrasonic images, information on user interfaces respectively connected to the plurality of control items, information on preset gain values (for example, preset TGC or preset LGC ), information about gestures that match a specific function, etc.

存储器1500可以是各种存储介质的任一种,例如闪速存储器,硬盘驱动器,EEPROM等。此外,超声波设备1000可以利用web存储器或在线执行存储器1500的存储功能的云服务器。The memory 1500 may be any one of various storage media, such as flash memory, hard disk drive, EEPROM, and the like. Also, the ultrasonic device 1000 may utilize a web storage or a cloud server that performs a storage function of the memory 1500 online.

输入装置1600是指用户输入用于控制超声波设备1000的数据的装置。输入装置1600可以包括诸如键盘,鼠标,触摸板,触摸屏和点动开关的硬件组件。然而,实施例不限于此,并且输入装置1600还可以包括各种其他输入单元中的任一个,包括心电图(ECG)测量模块,呼吸测量模块,语音识别传感器,手势识别传感器,指纹识别传感器,虹膜识别传感器,深度传感器,距离传感器等。根据示例性实施例,输入装置1600可以包括显示多个控制项目的第二显示单元200。The input device 1600 refers to a device for the user to input data for controlling the ultrasonic device 1000 . The input device 1600 may include hardware components such as a keyboard, a mouse, a touch pad, a touch screen, and a jog switch. However, the embodiment is not limited thereto, and the input device 1600 may also include any of various other input units, including an electrocardiogram (ECG) measurement module, a respiration measurement module, a voice recognition sensor, a gesture recognition sensor, a fingerprint recognition sensor, an iris Identification sensor, depth sensor, distance sensor, etc. According to an exemplary embodiment, the input device 1600 may include a second display unit 200 displaying a plurality of control items.

控制器1700可以控制超声波设备1000的所有操作。换句话说,控制器1700可以控制探头20,超声波收发器1100,图像处理器1200,通信模块1400,显示单元1300,存储器1500和输入装置1600的操作。The controller 1700 may control all operations of the ultrasonic device 1000 . In other words, the controller 1700 may control operations of the probe 20 , the ultrasonic transceiver 1100 , the image processor 1200 , the communication module 1400 , the display unit 1300 , the memory 1500 and the input device 1600 .

探头20,超声波收发器1100,图像处理器1200,通信模块1300,显示器1400,存储器1500,输入装置1600和控制器1700中的全部或一些可以被实现为软件模块。超声波发送/接收单元1100,图像处理器1200和通信模块1300中的至少一个可以包括在控制器1700中;然而,本发明的概念不限于此。All or some of the probe 20, the ultrasonic transceiver 1100, the image processor 1200, the communication module 1300, the display 1400, the memory 1500, the input device 1600 and the controller 1700 may be implemented as software modules. At least one of the ultrasonic transmission/reception unit 1100, the image processor 1200 and the communication module 1300 may be included in the controller 1700; however, the inventive concept is not limited thereto.

控制器1700可以基于指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置来从多个控制项目中确定至少一个控制项目。例如,控制器1700可以确定在距指示物400的预定距离内显示的至少一个控制项目。除此之外,超声波设备1700可以通过从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个菜单组中选择与指示物400的位置相对应的菜单组来确定至少一个控制项目。The controller 1700 may determine at least one control item from a plurality of control items based on the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 . For example, the controller 1700 may determine at least one control item displayed within a predetermined distance from the pointer 400 . Besides, the ultrasonic device 1700 may determine at least one control item by selecting a menu group corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 from among a plurality of menu groups displayed on the second display unit 200 .

控制器1700可以控制第一显示单元100以显示所确定的至少一个控制项目和指示指示物400的位置的指示符以及超声波图像。例如,控制器1700可以将指示符标记在该至少一个控制项目上。The controller 1700 may control the first display unit 100 to display the determined at least one control item and an indicator indicating the location of the pointer 400 and an ultrasonic image. For example, the controller 1700 may mark an indicator on the at least one control item.

由于指示物400在第二显示单元200上的位置改变,所以控制器1700可以改变指示符在第一显示单元100上标记的位置。Since the position of the pointer 400 on the second display unit 200 is changed, the controller 1700 may change the position marked by the pointer on the first display unit 100 .

控制器1700可以将至少一个控制项目和表示指示物400的位置的指示符显示为覆盖在显示在第一显示单元100的超声波图像上。这里,控制器1700可以基于预定义的透明度信息来确定在超声波图像上显示的至少一个控制项目的透明度。控制器1700可以根据所确定的透明度来将至少一个控制项目和表示指示物400的位置的指示符显示为在超声波图像上透明。The controller 1700 may display at least one control item and an indicator representing a position of the pointer 400 to be overlaid on the ultrasound image displayed on the first display unit 100 . Here, the controller 1700 may determine transparency of at least one control item displayed on the ultrasound image based on predefined transparency information. The controller 1700 may display at least one control item and an indicator representing a position of the pointer 400 to be transparent on the ultrasound image according to the determined transparency.

控制器1700可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域上显示包括指示符的至少一个控制项目。The controller 1700 may display an ultrasound image on a first area of the first display unit 100 , and may display at least one control item including an indicator on a second area of the first display unit 100 .

控制器1700可以经由第二显示单元200接收用于从多个控制项目中选择一个控制项目的第一输入。用于选择控制项目的第一输入可以不同于用于改变指示符的位置的第二输入。控制器1700可以在第一显示单元100上显示与所选择的控制项目对应的窗口。The controller 1700 may receive a first input for selecting one control item from a plurality of control items via the second display unit 200 . The first input for selecting the control item may be different from the second input for changing the position of the indicator. The controller 1700 may display a window corresponding to the selected control item on the first display unit 100 .

控制器1700可以基于指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置,从显示在第二显示单元200上的多个控制项目中选择第一控制项目。控制器1700可以确定与在第二显示单元200上显示第一控制项目的第一显示格式不同的第二显示格式,并且可以控制第一显示单元100以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目。根据示例性实施例,当与第一显示格式比较时,可以简化第二显示格式。The controller 1700 may select a first control item from among a plurality of control items displayed on the second display unit 200 based on a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 . The controller 1700 may determine a second display format different from the first display format in which the first control item is displayed on the second display unit 200, and may control the first display unit 100 to display the first control item in the second display format. According to an exemplary embodiment, the second display format may be simplified when compared with the first display format.

控制器1700感测指示物400触摸以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的位置,并且可以将表示指示物400的位置的指示符标记在以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上。The controller 1700 senses a position where the pointer 400 touches the first control item displayed in the first display format, and may mark an indicator representing the position of the pointer 400 on the first control item displayed in the second display format.

控制器1700可以根据指示物400在以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目上的位置的改变来移动以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上的指示符。The controller 1700 may move the pointer on the first control item displayed in the second display format according to the change of the position of the pointer 400 on the first control item displayed in the first display format.

控制器1700可以接收在以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目上拖动的拖动输入,并且可以根据拖动输入来改变以第二显示格式显示的第一控制项目上的指示符的位置。The controller 1700 may receive a drag input dragging on the first control item displayed in the first display format, and may change the position of the indicator on the first control item displayed in the second display format according to the drag input. .

如果感测到在第二显示单元200上以第一显示格式显示的第一控制项目的触摸,则控制器1700可以在第一显示单元200上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目,同时保持在第二显示单元200上第一控制项目的第一显示格式。If a touch of the first control item displayed in the first display format on the second display unit 200 is sensed, the controller 1700 may display the first control item in the second display format on the first display unit 200 while maintaining A first display format of the first control item on the second display unit 200 .

控制器1700可以将以第二显示格式的第一控制项目显示为覆盖在第一显示单元100的超声波图像上。可替代地,控制器1700可以在第一显示单元100的第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且可以在第一显示单元100的第二区域上以第二显示格式显示第一控制项目。这里,第一区域和第二区域可以彼此不同。The controller 1700 may display the first control item in the second display format to be overlaid on the ultrasound image of the first display unit 100 . Alternatively, the controller 1700 may display the ultrasound image on the first area of the first display unit 100 and may display the first control item in the second display format on the second area of the first display unit 100 . Here, the first area and the second area may be different from each other.

控制器1700可以基于指示物400触摸第二显示单元200的位置来控制第一显示单元100以显示通过连接与多个滑动条上的调整按钮的位置对应的增益值而形成的增益线以及超声波图像。The controller 1700 may control the first display unit 100 based on a position where the pointer 400 touches the second display unit 200 to display a gain line formed by connecting gain values corresponding to positions of adjustment buttons on a plurality of slide bars and an ultrasound image. .

控制器1700可以在第一显示单元100上显示的增益线上标记表示与指示物400在第一区域上的位置对应的深度部分的指示符。The controller 1700 may mark an indicator representing a depth portion corresponding to the position of the pointer 400 on the first area on the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 .

当指示物400在第一区域中的位置改变时,控制器1700可以移动在增益线上标记的指示符。When the position of the pointer 400 in the first area changes, the controller 1700 may move the pointer marked on the gain line.

控制器1700可以经由第二显示单元200接收用于移动多个滑动条上的调整按钮中的至少一个的输入。控制器1700可以基于至少一个调整按钮的位置来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线的形状。The controller 1700 may receive an input for moving at least one of the adjustment buttons on the plurality of slide bars via the second display unit 200 . The controller 1700 may change the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the position of at least one adjustment button.

控制器1700可以基于经由第二显示单元200感测的指示物400的触摸手势的种类来确定输入模式。这里,输入模式可以包括用于从超声波图像的深度部分中选择一个深度部分的深度选择模式和用于改变增益值的增益改变模式,但不限于此。The controller 1700 may determine the input mode based on the kind of the touch gesture of the pointer 400 sensed via the second display unit 200 . Here, the input mode may include a depth selection mode for selecting one depth portion from among depth portions of the ultrasound image and a gain change mode for changing a gain value, but is not limited thereto.

当指示物400的触摸手势是单手指手势时,控制器1700可以将深度选择模式确定为输入模式,并且当指示物400的触摸手势是多手指手势时可以将增益改变模式确定为输入模式。When the touch gesture of the pointer 400 is a single-finger gesture, the controller 1700 may determine a depth selection mode as an input mode, and may determine a gain change mode as an input mode when the touch gesture of the pointer 400 is a multi-finger gesture.

例如,控制器1700可以响应于与第一区域接触地向上或向下拖动一个手指的第一拖动手势,将标记在增益线上的指示符移动到第一深度部分。此外,控制器1700可以响应于在至少两个手指与第一区域接触的同时沿左右方向拖动至少两个手指的第二拖动手势来调整第一深度部分中的增益值。控制器1700可以基于调整的增益值来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的增益线的形状。For example, the controller 1700 may move the indicator marked on the gain line to the first depth portion in response to a first drag gesture of dragging one finger up or down in contact with the first region. Also, the controller 1700 may adjust the gain value in the first depth portion in response to a second drag gesture of dragging at least two fingers in left and right directions while the at least two fingers are in contact with the first region. The controller 1700 may change the shape of the gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the adjusted gain value.

控制器1700可以经由第二显示单元200接收用于从多个预设增益值集合中选择一个预设增益值集合的输入。根据选择的预设增益值集合,控制器1700可以移动多个滑动条上的调整按钮中的至少一个调整按钮。控制器1700可以在第一显示单元100上显示与所选择的预设增益值对应的增益线。The controller 1700 may receive an input for selecting one preset gain value set from a plurality of preset gain value sets via the second display unit 200 . According to the selected preset gain value set, the controller 1700 may move at least one adjustment button among the adjustment buttons on the plurality of slide bars. The controller 1700 may display a gain line corresponding to the selected preset gain value on the first display unit 100 .

基于用于触摸显示在第二显示单元上的第一增益线的触摸输入,控制器1700可以控制第一显示单元100显示与第一增益线对应的第二增益线以及超声波图像。这里,第一增益线和第二增益线可以是通过连接与超声波图像的深度部分对应的增益值而获得的线。Based on a touch input for touching a first gain line displayed on the second display unit, the controller 1700 may control the first display unit 100 to display a second gain line corresponding to the first gain line and an ultrasound image. Here, the first gain line and the second gain line may be lines obtained by connecting gain values corresponding to depth portions of the ultrasonic image.

控制器1700可以控制第一显示单元100在第一区域上显示超声波图像,并且在第一显示单元100的第二区域上显示第二增益线。The controller 1700 may control the first display unit 100 to display an ultrasound image on a first area, and display a second gain line on a second area of the first display unit 100 .

控制器1700可以在第二增益线上标记表示第一增益线上的触摸位置的指示符。当第一增益线上的触摸位置改变时,控制器1700可以移动标记在第二增益线上的指示符。The controller 1700 may mark an indicator representing a touch position on the first gain line on the second gain line. When the touch position on the first gain line changes, the controller 1700 may move the indicator marked on the second gain line.

控制器1700可以接收用于经由第一增益线将对应于第一增益线的第一增益值集合改变为第二增益值集合的输入。控制器1700可以基于设定的第二增益值集合来改变显示在第一显示单元100上的第二增益线的形状。The controller 1700 may receive an input for changing a first set of gain values corresponding to the first gain line to a second set of gain values via the first gain line. The controller 1700 may change the shape of the second gain line displayed on the first display unit 100 based on the set second gain value set.

当触摸第一增益线的触摸输入结束时,控制器1700可以停止显示第二增益线。When the touch input of touching the first gain line ends, the controller 1700 may stop displaying the second gain line.

传感器1900可以包括用于感测位于第二显示单元200上的指示物400和/或指示物400的位置的至少一个传感器。至少一个传感器可以包括触摸传感器,压力传感器,接近传感器,图像传感器(例如相机),深度传感器(例如深度相机)和红外线传感器(例如红外线相机)中的至少一个,但不限于此。The sensor 1900 may include at least one sensor for sensing the pointer 400 located on the second display unit 200 and/or the position of the pointer 400 . The at least one sensor may include at least one of a touch sensor, a pressure sensor, a proximity sensor, an image sensor (such as a camera), a depth sensor (such as a depth camera), and an infrared sensor (such as an infrared camera), but is not limited thereto.

一个或多个示例性实施例可以被实现为计算机可读介质中的计算机可读代码。计算机可读记录介质可以包括程序指令,本地数据文件,本地数据结构或其组合。计算机可读记录介质可以对于示例性实施例是特定的。计算机可读记录介质包括存储计算机可读数据的所有类型的可记录介质。计算机可读记录介质的示例包括磁介质,例如硬盘,软盘和磁带,光学介质,例如CD-ROM和DVD,磁光介质,例如光学磁盘,以及硬件存储器,例如ROM,RAM和闪速存储器,特别地配置为存储和执行程序指令。此外,计算机可读记录介质可以以诸如光、线或波导的传输介质的形式来实现,以发送指示程序指令、本地数据结构等的信号。程序指令的示例包括由编译器生成的机器代码和由使用解释器等的计算机执行的高级语言。One or more exemplary embodiments can be embodied as computer readable code on a computer readable medium. A computer-readable recording medium may include program instructions, local data files, local data structures, or a combination thereof. A computer-readable recording medium may be specific to an exemplary embodiment. The computer-readable recording medium includes all types of recordable media storing computer-readable data. Examples of computer-readable recording media include magnetic media such as hard disks, floppy disks, and magnetic tapes, optical media such as CD-ROMs and DVDs, magneto-optical media such as optical disks, and hardware memories such as ROM, RAM, and flash memory, especially configured to store and execute program instructions. Also, the computer-readable recording medium may be implemented in the form of a transmission medium such as light, wire, or waveguide to transmit signals indicative of program instructions, local data structures, and the like. Examples of program instructions include machine code generated by a compiler and high-level language executed by a computer using an interpreter or the like.

应当理解,本文描述的示例性实施例应仅在描述性意义上被考虑,而不是为了限制的目的。在其他示例性实施例中,每个示例性实施例中的特征或方面的描述通常被认为可用于其它类似特征或方面。It should be understood that the exemplary embodiments described herein should be considered in a descriptive sense only and not for purposes of limitation. Descriptions of features or aspects within each example embodiment should typically be considered as available for other similar features or aspects in other example embodiments.

虽然已经参考附图描述了一个或多个示例性实施例,但是本领域普通技术人员将会理解,在不脱离由权利要求所定义的精神和范围的情况下,可以在形式和细节上进行各种改变。Although one or more exemplary embodiments have been described with reference to the drawings, workers of ordinary skill in the art will understand that changes may be made in form and detail without departing from the spirit and scope defined by the claims. kind of change.

Claims (15)

1. a kind of ultrasonic equipment, including:
It is configured to show the first display of ultrasonography;
Control panel, including it is different from the first display and be configured to the display multiple controls related with the ultrasonography The second display of project processed;And
Controller, the position for the input tool being configured on the second display is from the multiple item controlled Select at least one item controlled, and control first display shown together with the ultrasonography it is selected extremely A few item controlled and the designator for the position for representing the input tool.
2. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, in addition at least one sensor, it is configured to sensing positioned at described The position of input tool on second display.
3. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 2, wherein, at least one described sensor is included from touch sensor, At least one selected in pressure sensor, proximity transducer, imaging sensor, depth transducer and infrared ray sensor.
4. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured to based at least one described control Whether project processed shows to select at least one described item controlled in the preset distance of the position apart from the input tool.
5. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured to by from being shown in described The menu group corresponding with the position of input tool is selected to select described at least one in multiple menu groups on two display units Individual item controlled.
6. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured at least one described control Display indicator in project.
7. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured in response to positioned at the second display Input tool position on device changes and changed the position of the designator shown on first display.
8. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the ultrasonography is included via the real-time of probe acquisition Ultrasonography.
9. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, first display is additionally configured at least one described in display The designator of the position of individual item controlled and expression input tool so that at least one control shown by first display Project and designator cover the ultrasonography.
10. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 9, wherein, the controller is additionally configured to based on predefined transparent Degree information is come the transparency of at least one item controlled described in determining to show on the ultrasonography.
11. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured in first display First area on show the ultrasonography, and on the second area of first display at least one described in display Individual item controlled and designator.
12. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured to via the described second display Device receives the first input for selecting an item controlled from least one described item controlled, and for selecting control First input of project is different from the second input for being used to change the position of designator.
13. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 12, wherein, the controller is additionally configured to single in the described first display Window corresponding with selected item controlled is shown in member.
14. ultrasonic equipment according to claim 1, wherein, the controller is additionally configured in the second display Presumptive area on be shown in the ultrasonography shown on first display.
15. a kind of method that information is provided via ultrasonic equipment, methods described includes:
Ultrasonography is shown on the first display;
The multiple item controlleds related to the ultrasonography are shown on the second display being included in control panel;
Position based on the input tool on the second display selects at least one from the multiple item controlled Item controlled;And
At least one selected item controlled and expression are shown together with the ultrasonography on first display The designator of the position of input tool.
CN201580066390.5A 2014-10-15 2015-10-14 Method and ultrasonic device for providing information using multiple displays Active CN107003404B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201462064145P 2014-10-15 2014-10-15
US62/064,145 2014-10-15
KR10-2015-0074182 2015-05-27
KR1020150074182A KR20160044401A (en) 2014-10-15 2015-05-27 Method and ultrasound apparatus for providing information using a plurality of display
PCT/KR2015/010849 WO2016060475A1 (en) 2014-10-15 2015-10-14 Method of providing information using plurality of displays and ultrasound apparatus therefor

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN107003404A true CN107003404A (en) 2017-08-01
CN107003404B CN107003404B (en) 2020-12-11

Family

ID=55918795

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201580066390.5A Active CN107003404B (en) 2014-10-15 2015-10-14 Method and ultrasonic device for providing information using multiple displays

Country Status (2)

Country Link
KR (2) KR20160044401A (en)
CN (1) CN107003404B (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108037891A (en) * 2017-12-26 2018-05-15 深圳开立生物医疗科技股份有限公司 A kind of annotation method, system, equipment and computer-readable storage medium
CN109512457A (en) * 2018-10-15 2019-03-26 沈阳东软医疗系统有限公司 Adjust method, apparatus, equipment and the storage medium of ultrasound image gain compensation
CN109727662A (en) * 2018-12-29 2019-05-07 上海联影医疗科技有限公司 Display method and device, device and non-transitory storage medium for medical image detection
CN111388007A (en) * 2020-03-19 2020-07-10 聊城市人民医院 Mobile ultrasonic detection device
CN111557687A (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-21 柯尼卡美能达株式会社 Ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus, recording medium, and method for displaying guidance on console
CN113126871A (en) * 2019-12-30 2021-07-16 无锡祥生医疗科技股份有限公司 Gain adjustment method, system and storage medium
CN114983488A (en) * 2021-03-01 2022-09-02 通用电气精准医疗有限责任公司 System and method for identifying biopsy location coordinates

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102635050B1 (en) * 2016-07-20 2024-02-08 삼성메디슨 주식회사 Ultrasound imaging apparatus and control method for the same
IL277247B2 (en) * 2018-04-24 2024-07-01 Supersonic Imagine Ultrasound imaging system

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030105400A1 (en) * 2001-11-29 2003-06-05 Ge Yokogawa Medical Systems, Limited Ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus
US20130090558A1 (en) * 2010-06-14 2013-04-11 Alpinion Medical Systems Co., Ltd. Ultrasonic diagnosis device, graphic environment control device for use therein, and control method therefor
EP2742869A1 (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-18 Samsung Medison Co., Ltd. Ultrasound apparatus and method of inputting information into the same
CN103945770A (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-07-23 日立阿洛卡医疗株式会社 Ultrasonic diagnostic device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030105400A1 (en) * 2001-11-29 2003-06-05 Ge Yokogawa Medical Systems, Limited Ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus
US20130090558A1 (en) * 2010-06-14 2013-04-11 Alpinion Medical Systems Co., Ltd. Ultrasonic diagnosis device, graphic environment control device for use therein, and control method therefor
CN103079476A (en) * 2010-06-14 2013-05-01 奥皮尼医疗系统有限公司 Ultrasonic diagnosis device, graphic environment control device for use therein, and control method therefor
CN103945770A (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-07-23 日立阿洛卡医疗株式会社 Ultrasonic diagnostic device
EP2742869A1 (en) * 2012-12-12 2014-06-18 Samsung Medison Co., Ltd. Ultrasound apparatus and method of inputting information into the same

Cited By (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108037891A (en) * 2017-12-26 2018-05-15 深圳开立生物医疗科技股份有限公司 A kind of annotation method, system, equipment and computer-readable storage medium
CN108037891B (en) * 2017-12-26 2022-04-01 深圳开立生物医疗科技股份有限公司 Annotation method, system, equipment and computer storage medium
CN109512457A (en) * 2018-10-15 2019-03-26 沈阳东软医疗系统有限公司 Adjust method, apparatus, equipment and the storage medium of ultrasound image gain compensation
CN109727662A (en) * 2018-12-29 2019-05-07 上海联影医疗科技有限公司 Display method and device, device and non-transitory storage medium for medical image detection
CN109727662B (en) * 2018-12-29 2023-01-24 上海联影医疗科技股份有限公司 Display method, device, device, and non-transitory storage medium for medical image detection
CN111557687A (en) * 2019-02-14 2020-08-21 柯尼卡美能达株式会社 Ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus, recording medium, and method for displaying guidance on console
US11653901B2 (en) 2019-02-14 2023-05-23 Konica Minolta, Inc. Ultrasound diagnostic apparatus, recording medium, and console guide display method
CN111557687B (en) * 2019-02-14 2023-08-11 柯尼卡美能达株式会社 Ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus, recording medium, and guidance display method for console
CN113126871A (en) * 2019-12-30 2021-07-16 无锡祥生医疗科技股份有限公司 Gain adjustment method, system and storage medium
CN111388007A (en) * 2020-03-19 2020-07-10 聊城市人民医院 Mobile ultrasonic detection device
CN114983488A (en) * 2021-03-01 2022-09-02 通用电气精准医疗有限责任公司 System and method for identifying biopsy location coordinates
CN114983488B (en) * 2021-03-01 2025-10-17 通用电气精准医疗有限责任公司 System and method for identifying biopsy location coordinates

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20160044401A (en) 2016-04-25
CN107003404B (en) 2020-12-11
KR20180098499A (en) 2018-09-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3009074B1 (en) Method of providing information using plurality of displays and ultrasound apparatus therefor
CN107003404B (en) Method and ultrasonic device for providing information using multiple displays
EP3441006B1 (en) Ultrasound apparatus and method of displaying ultrasound images
US10558350B2 (en) Method and apparatus for changing user interface based on user motion information
KR101728045B1 (en) Medical image display apparatus and method for providing user interface thereof
KR102185726B1 (en) Method and ultrasound apparatus for displaying a ultrasound image corresponding to a region of interest
EP2777506B1 (en) Method of providing copy image and ultrasound apparatus therefor
US20140164965A1 (en) Ultrasound apparatus and method of inputting information into same
KR102388130B1 (en) Apparatus and method for displaying medical image
KR102185725B1 (en) Method and ultrasound apparatus for displaying a ultrasound image
KR102418975B1 (en) Ultrasound apparatus and method for providing information
CN107106127A (en) Ultrasonic device and method for providing information of the ultrasonic device
US20140376793A1 (en) Ultrasonic diagnostic apparatus and method of operating the same
KR101580584B1 (en) Method and ultrasound apparatus for marking tumor on ultrasound elastography
KR102297148B1 (en) Ultrasound System And Method For Displaying 3 Dimensional Image
KR102519424B1 (en) Method of displaying a ultrasound image and apparatus thereof
EP2889744A1 (en) Method and apparatus for displaying medical images
CN104856727B (en) Method and ultrasound device for displaying position information of mucous bursa
KR102243024B1 (en) Method and ultrasound apparatus for displaying a diffusion boundary of medicine

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
GR01 Patent grant
GR01 Patent grant